WO2022045225A1 - Work assistance device, work assistance method, and computer program - Google Patents
Work assistance device, work assistance method, and computer program Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2022045225A1 WO2022045225A1 PCT/JP2021/031256 JP2021031256W WO2022045225A1 WO 2022045225 A1 WO2022045225 A1 WO 2022045225A1 JP 2021031256 W JP2021031256 W JP 2021031256W WO 2022045225 A1 WO2022045225 A1 WO 2022045225A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- shortage
- shelf
- information
- business support
- product
- Prior art date
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A47—FURNITURE; DOMESTIC ARTICLES OR APPLIANCES; COFFEE MILLS; SPICE MILLS; SUCTION CLEANERS IN GENERAL
- A47F—SPECIAL FURNITURE, FITTINGS, OR ACCESSORIES FOR SHOPS, STOREHOUSES, BARS, RESTAURANTS OR THE LIKE; PAYING COUNTERS
- A47F5/00—Show stands, hangers, or shelves characterised by their constructional features
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06Q—INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES; SYSTEMS OR METHODS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- G06Q30/00—Commerce
- G06Q30/06—Buying, selling or leasing transactions
Definitions
- This disclosure relates to business support equipment, business support methods, and computer programs.
- Patent Document 1 is limited to detecting product shortages on display shelves, and does not refer to improving work efficiency when shortages are detected.
- the purpose of this disclosure is to provide a technology for streamlining operations in the event of a shortage in a display shelf.
- the business support device includes a receiving unit that receives shortage detection information indicating a shelf and an article in which a missing item or a partial missing item is detected, and inventory information indicating the inventory status of the article. Based on the stock status of the article in which the shortage or partial shortage is detected shown in the inventory information, to the shelf of the article in which the shortage or partial shortage shown in the shortage detection information is detected. It is provided with a processing unit for controlling the transmission timing of information prompting the replenishment of the above.
- the information processing apparatus receives shortage detection information indicating a shelf and an article in which a missing item or a partial missing item is detected, and inventory information indicating the inventory status of the article. Then, based on the stock status of the article in which the shortage or partial shortage is detected shown in the inventory information, the missing item or partial missing item shown in the shortage detection information is detected. Controls the timing of sending information that prompts the shelves to be replenished.
- the computer program receives out-of-stock detection information indicating a shelf and an article in which a missing item or a partial missing item is detected, and inventory information indicating the inventory status of the article, and uses the inventory information as the inventory information. Based on the inventory status of the article in which the indicated shortage or partial shortage is detected, the shelf of the article in which the shortage or partial shortage indicated in the shortage detection information is detected is urged to be replenished. Let the computer do what it does to control when information is sent.
- the business support device includes a receiving unit that receives replenishment detection information indicating a shelf and an article in which the need for replenishment is detected, inventory information indicating the inventory status of the article, and the inventory information. Based on the inventory status of the article in which the need for replenishment indicated in is detected, the timing of transmitting information prompting the replenishment of the article in which the need for replenishment indicated in the replenishment detection information is detected to the shelf is set. It is provided with a processing unit to be controlled.
- the business support method receives replenishment detection information indicating a shelf and an article for which the need for replenishment has been detected, and inventory information indicating the inventory status of the article by an information processing apparatus, and the above-mentioned Based on the stock status of the article in which the need for replenishment indicated in the inventory information is detected, the transmission of information prompting the replenishment of the article in which the need for replenishment indicated in the replenishment detection information is detected is performed. Control the timing.
- the computer program receives replenishment detection information indicating the shelves and articles for which the need for replenishment is detected, and inventory information indicating the inventory status of the articles, and the replenishment indicated in the inventory information. Based on the inventory status of the article in which the necessity of the above is detected, the timing of transmitting information prompting the replenishment of the article in which the shortage or semi-deficiency indicated in the replenishment detection information is detected is controlled. Let the computer do that.
- the figure which shows the structural example of the shortage detection apparatus which concerns on Embodiment 1. The figure which shows the example of the surface where the product of the display shelf which concerns on Embodiment 1 is displayed.
- a flowchart showing an example of the alert determination process according to the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing an example of a complete shortage handling process according to the fourth embodiment.
- FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a business support system according to the first embodiment.
- the business support system is a system that detects product shortages on the display shelves 10 arranged in stores and supports business when the shortages are detected.
- the store is, for example, a supermarket, a convenience store, a department store, a mass retailer, a discount store, a bookstore, or a store of various facilities.
- goods goods sold in stores are displayed on the display shelves 10.
- the display shelf 10 is not limited to the inside of the store, but may be arranged outside the store.
- the display shelf 10 may be attached with a shelf tag 20 for displaying the product name, price, and the like of the products to be displayed.
- the shelf label 20 is an electronic shelf label provided with a liquid crystal display or electronic paper, and the display contents can be rewritten by wireless communication.
- the present embodiment is not limited to the electronic shelf label, and may be a shelf label in which the display content is printed or handwritten on paper.
- the shelf tag 20 may be read as another term such as a shelf tag, a shelf card, or a shelf label.
- the business support system includes a camera device 100, a shortage detection device 200, and a business support device 300.
- the business support system may further include a terminal 400.
- the terminal 400 is possessed by, for example, a person (hereinafter referred to as a “person in charge”) who performs business for a shortage.
- the person in charge 2 is, for example, a clerk or a store manager of a store in which the display shelf 10 is arranged.
- the camera device 100 is installed at a position where the surface of the display shelf 10 on which the products are displayed can be photographed.
- the camera device 100 transmits an image of the display shelf 10 (hereinafter referred to as a “photographed image”) to the shortage detection device 200 via a communication network.
- the communication network is configured by, for example, a wired LAN (Local Area Network) or a wireless LAN.
- a plurality of camera devices 100 may be installed in one store. Further, one display shelf 10 may be photographed by one camera device 100. Alternatively, a plurality of display shelves 10 may be photographed by one camera device 100. Alternatively, one display shelf 10 may be photographed by a plurality of camera devices 100.
- the camera device 100 may be a PTZ (pan / tilt zoom) camera.
- the camera device 100 may be installed for monitoring in the store (that is, a surveillance camera). Alternatively, the camera device 100 may be installed to detect a shortage in the display shelf 10.
- the shortage detection device 200 analyzes the captured image received from the camera device 100 and detects the display shelf 10 (hereinafter referred to as “out of stock shelf”) in which the shortage occurs.
- the shortage detection device 200 detects a shortage shelf
- the shortage detection device 200 transmits the shortage detection information including at least the identification information of the shortage shelf to the business support device 300 via the communication network 3.
- the communication network 3 is configured by, for example, the Internet.
- the shortage detection device 200 is installed in the store.
- the shortage detection device 200 may be installed as a server (for example, a cloud server) that provides a predetermined service via the communication network 3.
- the camera device 100 may transmit the captured image to the shortage detection device 200 via the communication network 3.
- the shortage is not limited to the state in which the specific product is completely disappeared from the display shelf 10, but also includes the state in which the specific product is partially out of stock.
- the partially out of stock state may be a state in which the replenishment of goods in the display shelf 10 is less than 100%, for example, a state in which the replenishment of goods in the display shelf 10 is 50% or less or 30% or less. good.
- the partial shortage is a state in which 20% to 80% of the products are replenished in the display shelf 10, or a state in which a certain number (for example, 3 to 5 in a shelf capable of displaying up to 10 pieces) has disappeared. You may. That is, the partial shortage may be in a state where the display shelf 10 is at least not full.
- the business support device 300 receives the shortage detection information from the shortage detection device 200, and based on the shortage detection information, information for supporting the business related to the shortage product of the person in charge 2 (hereinafter, “business support information”). ”) Is generated.
- the business support device 300 transmits the generated business support information to the terminal 400 of the person in charge 2.
- the business support information is, for example, information for the terminal 400 to display a UI (User Interface) for business support.
- the business support device 300 receives instruction information from the terminal 400 and performs processing corresponding to the instruction information.
- the instruction information is information indicating an instruction input to the terminal 400 by the person in charge 2.
- the business support device 300 is installed as a server (for example, a cloud server) that provides a predetermined service via the communication network 3.
- the business support device 300 transmits information for updating the display contents of the shelf label 20 attached to the display shelf 10 (hereinafter referred to as “shelf tag update information”) to the shelf label 20 of the store. good.
- shelf tag update information information for updating the display contents of the shelf label 20 attached to the display shelf 10
- the shelf label 20 that has received the shelf label update information updates the display content based on the shelf label update information.
- An example of the display content on the shelf tag 20 is a product name, a price, and / or POP information.
- the POP information is, for example, a catch phrase, a description, a discount price or a discount rate.
- the terminal 400 receives the business support information from the business support device 300, and displays the UI for business support based on the business support information. Further, the terminal 400 transmits the instruction information input by the person in charge 2 to the business support device 300.
- the terminal 400 is, for example, a tablet, a smartphone or a PC.
- the UI displayed on the terminal 400 may be a UI generated by the application running on the terminal 400 based on the business support information. Alternatively, the UI displayed on the terminal 400 may be a UI generated by the WEB browser operating on the terminal 400 based on the business support information.
- FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the shortage detection device 200.
- the shortage detection device 200 includes a processing unit 201, a memory 202, a communication unit 203, and a storage 204. These elements 201 to 204 are connected by an internal bus 205 capable of bidirectional communication. That is, the shortage detection device 200 may be configured by a computer device having a processor and a memory.
- the processing unit 201 executes a computer program and realizes the functions of the shortage detection device 200.
- the processing unit 201 may be read as another term such as a processor, a controller, a CPU (Central Processing Unit), or an integrated circuit. Further, in the following description, the processing mainly performed by the shortage detection device 200 may be read as the processing mainly performed by the processing unit 201.
- the memory 202 stores computer programs and data related to the functions of the shortage detection device 200.
- the memory 202 may be configured by, for example, a ROM (ReadOnlyMemory), a RAM (RandomAccessMemory), or a combination thereof.
- the storage 204 stores computer programs and data related to the functions of the shortage detection device 200.
- the storage 204 may be configured by, for example, an HDD (Hard Disk Drive), an SSD (Solid State Drive), or a flash memory. Further, the storage 204 may store the shelf allocation information 210.
- the shelf allocation information 210 is information used to identify the display shelf 10 and the section 30.
- the communication unit 203 controls the transmission and reception of data with other devices via the communication network.
- the communication unit 203 may include a transmission unit 203A that controls the transmission of data and a reception unit 203B that controls the reception of data.
- the communication unit 203 may be read as another term such as a communication interface or a communication module.
- FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a surface on which the products of the display shelf 10 are displayed. Next, with reference to FIG. 3, an example of a method in which the shortage detection device 200 detects the display shelf 10 in which the shortage has occurred will be described.
- the display shelf 10 is divided into a plurality of display spaces 12 by the shelf board 11.
- a shelf tag 20 is attached to the shelf board 11.
- the same product corresponding to the shelf tag 20 is displayed.
- the space where the same product corresponding to the shelf tag 20 is displayed is referred to as a section 30.
- the shortage detection device 200 sets a section 30 for a photographed image of the display shelf 10.
- a gap is provided between each of the compartments 30, but this may not be provided.
- the shape of the compartment 30 is not limited to a rectangle, and may be a polygon, an ellipse, or a circle.
- the section 30 may be manually set for the captured image of the display shelf 10. Alternatively, the section 30 may be automatically set by the shortage detection device 200. An example in which the shortage detection device 200 automatically sets the section 30 will be described later.
- the section 30 shown by the dotted line indicates the section 30 where the shortage has occurred.
- the shortage detection device 200 analyzes the images of each section 30 in the captured image of the display shelf 10 as shown in FIG. 3, and determines whether or not the display shelf 10 is out of stock.
- the shortage detection device 200 stores in advance an image (hereinafter referred to as “out of stock image”) of the section 30 when the product is not displayed (that is, when the product is out of stock), and takes a picture of the display shelf 10.
- an image hereinafter referred to as “out of stock image”
- the out-of-stock image is, for example, an image of the background of the display shelf 10.
- the out-of-stock detection device 200 may specify the out-of-stock section 30 (hereinafter referred to as "out-of-stock section”) in addition to the out-of-stock display shelf 10 (that is, the out-of-stock shelf). ..
- the shortage detection device 200 uses the shortage shelf identification information (hereinafter referred to as "out of stock shelf identification information”) and the shortage section identification information (hereinafter referred to as "out of stock section identification information"). , May be included in the shortage detection information.
- the shortage detection device 200 identifies the products displayed in the shortage section (hereinafter referred to as “missing products”), and identifies the identified shortage products (hereinafter referred to as “out of stock product identification information”). ) May be included in the shortage detection information.
- the shortage detection device 200 may identify the shortage product in the shortage section by using the shelf allocation information 210 described later.
- FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of shelf allocation information 210.
- the shelf allocation information 210 has an area ID, a shelf ID, a shelf, a position number, a displayable number, and product information as items.
- the area ID is information for identifying the area in the store.
- the shelf ID is information for identifying the display shelf 10 in the area indicated by the area ID.
- the shelf is information indicating the number of shelves counted from the bottom (that is, information indicating the display space 12) in the display shelf 10 indicated by the shelf ID.
- the shelf may be information indicating the number of shelves counted from the top.
- the position number is information indicating the number of the section 30 counted from the left in the display space 12 indicated by the shelf.
- the position number may be information indicating the number of the section 30 counted from the right in the display space 12 indicated by the shelf.
- the number that can be displayed is information indicating the number of products that can be displayed in the section 30 indicated by the shelf and the position number.
- -Product information is information on products displayed in the shelves and the section 30 indicated by the position number.
- the product information includes, for example, at least one of a product code, a product name, and a price corresponding to the product.
- the shelf stage and the position number in the shelf allocation information 210 are examples of information for identifying the section 30 in the display shelf 10 indicated by the shelf ID (hereinafter referred to as “section identification information”).
- section identification information As the information other than the shelves and the position numbers, the coordinate values on the display shelf 10 can be considered. This is, for example, a value that specifies the position itself, such as how many mm to the right and how many mm below from this starting point, starting from the upper left of the display shelf 10.
- the shortage detection device 200 identifies the shelf ID of the display shelf 10 (that is, the shortage shelf) in which the shortage has occurred with reference to the shelf allocation information 210, and includes the specified shelf ID in the shortage shelf identification information. You can do it. Further, the out-of-stock detection device 200 specifies the section identification information and the number of items that can be displayed in the section 30 in which the out-of-stock has occurred, with reference to the shelf allocation information 210, and the specified section identification information and the number of items that can be displayed are out of stock. It may be included in the partition identification information. Further, the shortage detection device 200 may specify the product information of the product in which the shortage has occurred with reference to the shelf allocation information 210, and include the specified product information in the shortage product identification information.
- FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the terminal 400.
- the terminal 400 includes a processing unit 401, a memory 402, a communication unit 403, an input unit 404, a display unit 405, and a storage unit 406. These elements 401 to 406 are connected by an internal bus 407 capable of bidirectional communication. That is, the terminal 400 may be configured by a computer device having a processor and a memory.
- the processing unit 401 executes a computer program and realizes the functions of the terminal 400.
- the processing unit 401 may be read as another term such as a processor, a controller, a CPU, or an integrated circuit. Further, in the following description, the processing mainly performed by the terminal 400 may be read as the processing mainly performed by the processing unit 401.
- the memory 402 stores computer programs and data related to the functions of the terminal 400.
- the memory 402 may be composed of, for example, a ROM, a RAM, or a combination thereof.
- the storage 406 stores computer programs and data related to the functions of the terminal 400.
- the storage 406 may be configured by, for example, an HDD, SSD or flash memory.
- the communication unit 403 controls the transmission and reception of data with other devices via the communication network.
- the communication unit 403 may include a transmission unit 403A that controls the transmission of data and a reception unit 403B that controls the reception of data.
- the communication unit 403 may be read as another term such as a communication interface or a communication module.
- the input unit 404 receives an operation input to the terminal 400.
- the input unit 404 is composed of an input interface such as a button, a switch, a touch panel and / or a microphone.
- the display unit 405 displays UI characters, images, and the like.
- the display unit 405 may be read as another term such as a display or a monitor.
- FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the business support device 300.
- the business support device 300 includes a processing unit 301, a memory 302, a communication unit 303, and a storage 304. These elements 301 to 304 are connected by an internal bus 305 capable of bidirectional communication. That is, the business support device 300 may be configured by a computer device having a processor and a memory.
- the processing unit 301 executes a computer program and realizes the functions of the business support device 300.
- the processing unit 301 may be read as another term such as a processor, a controller, a CPU, or an integrated circuit.
- the processing mainly performed by the business support device 300 may be read as the processing mainly performed by the processing unit 301.
- the memory 302 stores computer programs and data related to the functions of the business support device 300.
- the memory 302 may be composed of, for example, a ROM, a RAM, or a combination thereof.
- the storage 304 stores computer programs and data related to the functions of the business support device 300.
- the storage 304 may be composed of, for example, an HDD, an SSD, or a flash memory.
- the communication unit 303 controls transmission / reception of data with other devices via the communication network.
- the communication unit 303 may include a transmission unit 303A that controls the transmission of data and a reception unit 303B that controls the reception of data.
- the communication unit 303 may be read as another term such as a communication interface or a communication module.
- FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of management information.
- the business support device 300 stores the management information 310 used for generating the business support information in the storage 304.
- the management information 310 includes at least one of the following information.
- Product information that is information about products
- Shelf allocation information that is information about shelf allocation of display shelves
- Inventory information that is information about inventory of products
- Shelf map information that is information about arrangement of display shelves
- Information about price of products Certain price information ⁇
- Demand forecast information related to demand forecast of products ⁇ Out of stock history information which is history information about shortages ⁇ Order history information which is history information about orders ⁇ Out of stock handling history information which is history information about dealing with shortages ⁇ Shelf allocation advice handling history information, which is historical information on dealing with shelf allocation advice
- the shelf allocation information held by the business support device 300 may be the same information as the shelf allocation information 210 held by the shortage detection device 200 shown in FIG. Alternatively, the shelf allocation information held by the business support device 300 may be information that is at least partially different from the shelf allocation information 210 held by the shortage detection device 200 shown in FIG. Further, the business support device 300 may hold the shelf allocation information for each store.
- FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an example of a login UI for a business support service.
- FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of a service menu UI in a business support service.
- the business support device 300 When the business support device 300 receives access from the terminal 400, the business support device 300 first provides the login UI 900 shown in FIG. 8 to the terminal 400. The person in charge 2 inputs the user ID and password given in advance to the person in charge 2 to the login UI 900, and presses the login button 901. When the business support device 300 succeeds in authenticating the input user ID and password, the business support device 300 provides the service menu UI 910 shown in FIG. 9 to the terminal 400. The "press" of the button in the description of the UI can be read as another term such as "touch", “tap”, “click” or “selection" of the button.
- the business support device 300 provides the following business support services. ⁇ Out of stock information service that provides information on shortages ⁇ Shelf map service that provides location information of display shelves ⁇ Order history service that provides order history information of products ⁇ Shelf allocation advice service that provides advice information on shelving allocation ⁇ Shelf allocation change service that accepts changes in shelving allocation ⁇ Price change service that accepts changes in product prices
- FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a shortage information UI.
- the business support device 300 provides the shortage information UI 1000 as shown in FIG. 10 to the terminal 400.
- the shortage information UI 1000 has an urgency area 1001, a shortage shelf information area 1002, a shortage product information area 1003, an inventory information area 1004, and a coping area 1005.
- the urgency information may be the values of A, B, and C in descending order of urgency.
- the business support device 300 may determine the urgency information according to the number of shelves in stock of the out-of-stock product, the demand information of the out-of-stock product, and the like. For example, the business support device 300 determines the urgency to A when the number of shelves in stock of the out-of-stock product is less than a1, and determines the urgency to B when the number of shelves in stock of the out-of-stock product is less than a2.
- the urgency is determined to be C.
- a 1 , a 2 , and a 3 are integers of 1 or more, and a 1 ⁇ a 2 ⁇ a 3 .
- the person in charge 2 can appropriately determine the urgency of replenishing the missing product by referring to the urgency information.
- out-of-stock shelf information area 1002 as information for identifying the out-of-stock shelf and the out-of-stock section, for example, as shown in FIG. 10, information on an area ID, a shelf ID, a shelf stage and a position number, or coordinates is displayed. Will be done.
- the business support device 300 may specify such information based on the shortage detection information received from the shortage detection device 200.
- a button 1006 for displaying the position of the shortage shelf on a map is displayed.
- the business support device 300 provides the shelf map UI 1100 as shown in FIG. 11 to the terminal 400.
- the shelf map UI1100 will be described later (see FIG. 11).
- the product information of the out-of-stock product and the number of shortages are displayed.
- the product information includes the product code and the product name.
- the business support device 300 identifies the product information and the number of shortages of the shortage product from the shortage detection information and the demand forecast information of the product received from the shortage detection device 200.
- the number of shortages may be identified based on the number of items that can be displayed in the shortage detection information, or before the demand is expected to increase by predicting that the demand will rise or fall due to marketing such as bargain sale. May be changed so that the number of shortages becomes large. That is, even though the number of products placed on the shelves has not decreased, the demand forecast may instruct the product to be replenished, or the shortage may be increased and set.
- the shelving allocation may be changed.
- the number of shortages does not necessarily have to be the absolute number of products, and the degree of shortage may be classified into A (1 to 10), B (11 to 20), C (21 to 30), and the like. good.
- Inventory information of out-of-stock products is displayed in the inventory information area 1004.
- the inventory information may include a first inventory position and inventory quantity of the out-of-stock product, and a second inventory position and inventory quantity of the out-of-stock product.
- the first inventory position is the position of the inventory shelf existing in the same area as the display shelf 10
- the second inventory position is the inventory existing in an area different from the display shelf 10 (for example, the backyard of the store).
- the position of the shelf In the example of FIG. 10, there are "10" out-of-stock products in the first inventory position "A-3" and "24" in the second inventory position "DD-47". show.
- the business support device 300 specifies, for example, how many out-of-stock products are in stock at which inventory position based on the inventory information of the store.
- a button 1007 for displaying the first inventory position on a map and a button 1008 for displaying the second inventory position on a map are displayed.
- the business support device 300 provides the stock position map UI to the terminal 400 when the buttons 1007 and 1008 are pressed.
- the inventory position map UI is not shown, it may be the same as the shelf map UI 1100 shown in FIG.
- a button 1009 for ordering a missing product is displayed in the inventory information area 1004.
- the business support device 300 provides the terminal 400 with a UI (not shown) for ordering a shortage product.
- a button for selecting a handling for the out-of-stock product is displayed.
- an incomplete button 1010, a completed button 1011, a neglected button 1012, and an ordered button 1013 are displayed in the coping area 1005.
- the person in charge 2 may select the incomplete button 1010 when the handling of the out-of-stock product is incomplete.
- the person in charge 2 may select the completion button 1011 when the handling of the out-of-stock product has been completed.
- the person in charge 2 may select the leave button 1012 when leaving the handling of the out-of-stock product.
- the person in charge 2 may select the ordered button 1013 when the order for the out-of-stock product has been completed.
- the business support device 300 records the handling information corresponding to the selected button as the shortage handling history information.
- the shortage information UI1000 may display a shortage occurrence ID for identifying the occurrence of a shortage.
- “K19-114” shown in FIG. 10 is a display example of a shortage occurrence ID.
- the left arrow button 1014 and the right arrow button 1015 are buttons for switching the display to the shortage information UI 1000 corresponding to another shortage occurrence ID.
- the business support device 300 provides the terminal 400 with a shortage information UI corresponding to the previous shortage occurrence ID when the left arrow button 1014 is pressed, and when the right arrow button 1015 is pressed, the next The shortage information UI corresponding to the shortage occurrence ID is provided to the terminal 400.
- FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a shelf map UI related to the shortage information service.
- FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a display shelf UI related to a shortage information service.
- the shelf map UI1100 displays a shelf map showing the arrangement of the display shelves 10 in the store and an image showing the out-of-stock shelves. For example, the out-of-stock shelves are displayed in a manner distinguishable from the other display shelves 10 (eg, in a different color).
- the shelf map UI1100 displays information indicating the status of dealing with shortages in the display shelf 10. For example, as shown in FIG. 11, a double circle mark is displayed on the display shelf 10 in which the response to the shortage is “incomplete”, and a black triangle is displayed on the display shelf 10 in which the response to the shortage is “left”. A black square mark may be displayed on the display shelf 10 for which the mark is "ordered" for dealing with the shortage.
- the display of the mark shown in FIG. 11 is an example, and a mark different from these may be displayed.
- the business support device 300 provides the terminal 400 with a display shelf UI1200 corresponding to the selected shortage shelf.
- the display shelf UI1200 schematically shows the display shelf 10.
- the display shelf UI1200 may use an image taken by the display shelf 10 by the camera device 100.
- the shortage section 1201 may be displayed in a mode (for example, a different color) different from that of the other sections 30.
- the ordered shortage section 1202 may be displayed in a mode (for example, a different color) different from that of the other sections 30.
- the person in charge 2 can efficiently confirm the information regarding the shortage by using the shortage information service.
- the business support device 300 may present the shortage information UI 1000 to the terminal 400 by push notification.
- the person in charge 2 can immediately recognize the shortage product and the shortage shelf, so that the shortage can be dealt with quickly.
- FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a shelf map UI related to the shelf map service.
- FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a display shelf UI related to the shelf map service.
- the shortage shelf when a shortage shelf exists, the shortage shelf may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a different color) from the display shelf 10 in which no shortage has occurred. Since the shelf map UI 1300 is almost the same as the shelf map UI 1100 described with reference to FIG. 11, detailed description thereof will be omitted.
- the business support device 300 When the person in charge 2 selects the display shelf 10 from the shelf map UI 1300, the business support device 300 provides the terminal 400 with the display shelf UI 1400 corresponding to the selected display shelf 10 as shown in FIG.
- the shortage section when a shortage section exists, the shortage section may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a different color) from the other sections 30 as in FIG. 12. Further, in the display shelf UI1400, when the ordered shortage section exists, the ordered shortage section may be displayed in a different mode (for example, different color) from the other sections 30 as in FIG. 12. Since the display shelf UI1400 is almost the same as the display shelf UI1200 described with reference to FIG. 12, detailed description thereof will be omitted.
- the person in charge 2 can visually confirm the missing shelf from the shelf map by using the shelf map service.
- FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of an order history UI.
- the business support device 300 provides the order history UI 1500 as shown in FIG. 15 to the terminal 400.
- the order history UI1500 displays the order date, order time, identification information of the shortage shelf and the shortage section, the product code, the product name, the number of orders, and the status related to the order for each ordered product.
- the business support device 300 may generate the order history UI 1500 based on the order history information.
- the person in charge 2 can easily check the history information of the order for the shortage by using the order history service.
- FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a shelf map UI related to the shelf allocation advice service.
- FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of a shelf allocation advice UI.
- the shelf allocation advice service is selected from the service menu UI 910, the business support device 300 provides the shelf map UI 1600 as shown in FIG. 16 to the terminal 400. Since the shelf map UI 1600 is almost the same as the shelf map UI 1100 described with reference to FIG. 11, detailed description thereof will be omitted.
- the business support device 300 When the person in charge 2 selects the display shelf 10 for which shelves allocation advice is desired from the shelf map UI 1600, the business support device 300 provides the shelf allocation advice corresponding to the selected display shelves 10 as shown in FIG.
- the UI 1700 is provided to the terminal 400.
- the shelf allocation advice UI 1700 has a display shelf area 1701, an advice area 1702, and a coping area 1703.
- the current shelf allocation in the selected display shelf and the information for specifying the section 30 to be advised are displayed.
- the content of the advice for the section 30 to be advised is displayed.
- a sentence recommending the replacement of the products in the section “1-3” and the section “3-2” to be advised is displayed.
- the reason for the advice may be displayed in the advice area 1702.
- the number of missing items in the section “1-3” is “8 times”
- the number of missing items in the section “3-2” is “0 times”.
- a button for selecting coping with the advice is displayed.
- the coping button 1704, the coping impossible button 1705, and the hold button 1706 are displayed.
- the person in charge 2 may select the addressed button 1704 when the response to the advice has been completed. If the person in charge 2 cannot deal with the advice, the person in charge 2 may select the unhandled button 1705. The person in charge 2 may select the hold button 1706 when he / she wants to withhold the response to the advice.
- the business support device 300 records the handling information corresponding to the selected button as the shelf allocation advice handling history information.
- the business support device 300 may generate shelving allocation advice based on the shelving allocation information and the shortage history information. For example, the business support device 300 generates advice for exchanging a product section 30 in which the number of times of shortage occurs is b 1 or more and a product section 30 in which the number of times of shortage occurs is less than b 2 times. good. b 1 and b 2 are integers of 1 or more, and b 1 > b 2 . Products that frequently run out of stock are popular products, and it is considered that they will sell well even if the display area 30 (that is, shelving allocation) is changed. This is because it is considered that there is room for increasing the number of sales by changing the display area 30 (that is, the shelf allocation).
- the shelf allocation advice UI1700 may display an advice ID for identifying the advice. “A19-21” shown in FIG. 17 is a display example of the advice ID.
- shelf allocation advice UI 1700 may display a button (not shown) for transitioning to the shelf allocation UI (see FIG. 18) for changing the shelf allocation of the displayed display shelf 10.
- Person in charge 2 can know the shelving allocation that can improve the sales performance by using the shelving allocation advice service.
- FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of a shelf allocation change UI.
- the shelf allocation change service is selected from the service menu UI 910, the business support device 300 provides the shelf allocation change UI 1800 shown in FIG. 18 to the terminal 400.
- the shelf allocation change UI 1800 has a shelf area 1801 and a product input area 1802.
- the current shelf allocation section 30 is displayed.
- the person in charge 2 can operate the compartment 30 of the shelf area 1801 to expand and contract the compartment 30, replace the compartment 30, and the like.
- the person in charge 2 can expand the section 1803 by selecting the section 1803 and sliding the left side of the section 1803 in the direction of the arrow 1804.
- the product information of the product to be displayed in the section 30 is input.
- the business support device 300 requests the selected section 30.
- the shelving allocation information is updated so as to associate the product information input in the product input area 1802.
- the person in charge 2 may manually input the product information in the product input area 1802.
- the person in charge 2 may input the product information in the product input area 1802 by reading the barcode (or QR code (registered trademark)) attached to the product with the camera of the terminal 400.
- the business support device 300 updates the shelving allocation information based on the changed section 30 and / or the product information.
- the recommended shelf allocation section 30 may be displayed instead of the current shelf allocation section 30.
- the business support device 300 determines the recommended shelf allocation section 30 by the same method as the above-mentioned shelf allocation advice based on the shelf allocation information and the shortage history information.
- the person in charge 2 can easily notify the business support device 300 of the change of the shelf allocation by using the shelf allocation change service.
- FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a price change UI.
- the business support device 300 provides the price change UI 1900 shown in FIG. 19 to the terminal 400.
- the price change date In the price change UI 1900, the price change date, the price change time, the identification information of the display shelf 10 and the section 30 on which the product is displayed, the product code, the product name, the price before the change and the change are provided for each product whose price has been changed.
- the post-price is displayed.
- the changed price may be determined by the business support device 300. Further, the person in charge 2 may select the changed price from the price change UI 1900 and re-change the changed price determined by the business support device 300.
- the business support device 300 stores the changed price in the price information. Further, when the confirmation button 1805 is pressed, the business support device 300 updates the display price of the shelf label 20 to the changed price. The business support device 300 may change the price of the product according to the change of the section 30.
- the person in charge 2 can efficiently change the displayed price of the shelf tag 20 on the display shelf 10 by using the price change service.
- the business support device 300 may provide the terminal 400 with information indicating the degree of shortage of each product in the store and / or area designated by the person in charge 2.
- the business support device 300 may provide the terminal 400 with information indicating the degree of shortage of each product in all stores.
- FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining an example of a detection method for the shelf label 20.
- the shortage detection device 200 analyzes the photographed image of the display shelf 10 shown in FIG. 20, and is attached to the shelf board 11 on the m-th stage from the bottom, the nth shelf label 20 from the left and n + 1 from the left. The second shelf label 20 is detected. Similarly, the shortage detection device 200 is attached to the shelf board 11 on the m + 1st stage from the bottom, the nth shelf label 20 from the left, the n + 1th shelf label 20 from the left, and the n + second shelf label from the left. Detects the shelf tag 20.
- the shortage detection device 200 is attached to the m + 2nd shelf board 11 from the bottom, the nth shelf label 20 from the left, the n + 1th shelf label 20 from the left, and the n + 2nd shelf label from the left. Detects the shelf tag 20. m and n are integers of 1 or more. In this way, the shortage detection device 200 may detect the shelf tag 20 from left to right for each shelf stage. Note that the detection from left to right is an example, and the shortage detection device 200 may detect the shelf label 20 from right to left.
- FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining an example of a setting method of the section 30.
- the shortage detection device 200 sets a section 30 corresponding to the shelf label 20 based on the position of the shelf label 20 detected as described above. For example, when the m-th row nth shelf label 20 corresponding to the product is attached to the lower left of the section 30 where the common product is displayed, the shortage detection device 200 performs the following processing. That is, in the shortage detection device 200, the width Rx from the position of the nth shelf label 20 in the mth stage to the position of the shelf label 20 in the mth stage n + 1st (that is, to the right) is set as the width of the section 30.
- the height Ry from the position of the nth shelf label 20 in the row to the position of the nth shelf label 20 in the m + 1st stage (that is, the upper row) is defined as the height of the section 30. Then, the shortage detection device 200 associates the section 30 set in this way with the nth shelf tag 20 in the m-th stage.
- the shortage detection device 200 can automatically set the section 30 corresponding to the nth shelf tag 20 in the mth stage.
- the method for automatically setting the section 30 of the display shelf 10 is not limited to the above method.
- the shortage detection device 200 may associate the lower section 30 of the shelf tag 20 with the shelf tag 20.
- the shortage detection device 200 may have a predetermined width Rx centered on the shelf tag 20 as the width of the section 30.
- the shortage detection device 200 may divide the display space 12 into equal intervals and set each of the display spaces 12 in the compartment 30.
- the shortage detection device 200 may set the section 30 based on the partition plate physically present in the display space 12.
- the business support device 300 may determine the section 30 of the display shelf 10 including the product to be displayed and provide it to the terminal 400. If it is desired to change the section 30 or the like due to the circumstances of the store, the instruction may be given by the shelf allocation change UI 1800 shown in FIG. 18 above.
- the function of the shortage detection device 200 may be included in the business support device 300.
- the business support device 300 receives the captured image from the camera device 100 via the communication network 3, and similarly to the above-mentioned shortage detection device 200, the section 30 is set in the display shelf 10 and the shelf allocation information 210 is generated. , And shortage detection and the like may be executed.
- the business support device (300) is from a shortage detection device (200) that detects a shortage shelf, which is a display shelf in which a shortage has occurred, based on a photographed image of the display shelf (10) of goods.
- the receiving unit (303B) that receives information about the shortage shelves, the information about the shortage shelves, and the shelf map information indicating the arrangement of the display shelves, the position of the shortage shelves is specified, and the shortage shelves are located.
- It includes a processing unit (301) that generates business support information including information indicating a position, and a transmission unit (303A) that transmits business support information to a terminal (400).
- the terminal can display information indicating the position of the out-of-stock shelf. Therefore, the person in charge can recognize the position of the shortage shelf through the terminal, so that the work related to the shortage can be streamlined.
- the processing unit (301) may include information for the terminal (400) to display the shortage shelf in a mode different from that of the other display shelves (10) in the business support information.
- the terminal can display the shortage shelf in a manner different from that of other display shelves. Therefore, the person in charge can visually recognize the shortage shelf through the terminal, so that the work related to the shortage can be streamlined.
- the receiving unit (303B) receives the information input to the terminal (400) indicating the handling of the shortage shelf, and the processing unit (301) receives the information indicating the handling of the shortage shelf as business support information. May be included in.
- the terminal (400) can display information indicating how to deal with the shortage of the shortage shelf. Therefore, since the person in charge can recognize the current response to the shortage of the shortage shelf through the terminal, the work related to the shortage can be streamlined.
- the processing unit (301) may include information on the goods in which the shortage has occurred and information on the inventory of the goods in which the shortage has occurred in the business support information.
- the terminal can display information on the goods in which the shortage has occurred and information on the inventory of the goods in which the shortage has occurred. Therefore, the person in charge can recognize the information on the product in which the shortage has occurred and the information on the inventory of the product in which the shortage has occurred through the terminal, so that the work for the shortage can be made more efficient.
- the processing unit (301) determines the urgency of replenishment of the goods with the shortage based on the information indicating the inventory status of the goods with the shortage, and provides the information indicating the urgency to the business support. May be included in the information. This allows the terminal to display the urgency of replenishing the missing item. Therefore, the person in charge can recognize the urgency of replenishing the article in which the shortage has occurred through the terminal, so that the work related to the shortage can be streamlined.
- the information regarding the out-of-stock shelf may include identification information of the out-of-stock section, which is the section (30) in which the out-of-stock has occurred in the out-of-stock shelf, which is detected by the out-of-stock detection device (200).
- the processing unit (301) may include information for the terminal (400) to display the shortage section in a mode different from that of the other sections (30) in the business support information. As a result, the terminal can display the shortage section in a manner different from that of other sections. Therefore, the person in charge can visually recognize the shortage section through the terminal, so that the work related to the shortage can be streamlined.
- the processing unit (301) may generate information on the change of the section based on the history information on the shortage in the section (30) and include it in the business support information.
- the terminal can display information regarding the change of the display shelf section (for example, shelving allocation advice information). Therefore, the person in charge can recognize the change of the display shelf to a more appropriate section through the terminal, and can streamline the work related to the shelving allocation.
- FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of the notification UI in the terminal 400.
- the terminal 400 receives the shortage notification from the business support device 300, the terminal 400 displays the notification UI 2000 on the display unit 405 as shown in FIG. 22.
- the notification UI 2000 includes the notification image 2001.
- the notification image 2001 includes, for example, an icon 2002 indicating a shortage notification, a sentence 2003 indicating that the shortage is detected, a time 2004 when the shortage is detected, and information 2005 indicating the status of the shortage.
- the information 2005 indicating the status of the shortage may include, for example, the number of complete shortages 2006A and the number of partial shortages 2006B.
- Complete shortage means that all the products detected as out of stock are out of stock on the display shelf.
- Partial shortage means that the product for which the shortage is detected is partially out of stock on the display shelf. For example, in a product arranged side by side in a plurality of rows, if one row is out of stock and / or if it is less than a predetermined quantity or space, these are called partial shortages. ..
- the interval at which the business support device 300 notifies the terminal 400 of a shortage is the interval at which the business support device 300 acquires information indicating detection of a shortage (hereinafter referred to as “out of stock detection information”) from the shortage detection device 200. May be longer than.
- the business support device 300 acquires out-of-stock detection information from the out-of-stock detection device 200 at 5-minute intervals. Then, the business support device 300 determines whether or not to perform the shortage notification based on the acquired shortage detection information, and when it is determined to perform the shortage notification, the periodic timing (hereinafter, "outage notification timing"). ”) To notify you of the shortage.
- the out-of-stock notification timing may be set as a periodic time such as 0 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, and 45 minutes every hour. Alternatively, the shortage notification timing may be set as a cycle such as a 15-minute interval or a 30-minute interval.
- the business support device 300 may be set to notify the shortage during the business hours of the store (for example, between 8:00 and 22:00) and not to notify the shortage outside the business hours of the store. Further, the business support device 300 may collectively notify the shortage of a plurality of shortages occurring in the store at the shortage notification timing. Further, the business support device 300 may give a shortage notification when it detects a complete shortage or a partial shortage. Alternatively, the business support device 300 may give a shortage notification when it detects a complete shortage, and may not give a shortage notification when it detects a partial shortage.
- the business support device 300 does not have to re-notify the shortage that has been notified at the previous shortage notification timing at the current shortage notification timing. For example, when the business support device 300 acquires the same out-of-stock detection information as the out-of-stock detection information acquired at the previous out-of-stock notification timing at the current out-of-stock notification timing, the same out-of-stock detection information is notified and determined. It may be excluded from the target of.
- the business support device 300 can prevent the terminal 400 from being excessively notified of the shortage.
- the usefulness and reliability of the shortage notification for the terminal 400 are improved, so that the person in charge 2 efficiently performs the work for the shortage (for example, replenishment of the shortage product) through the shortage notification of the terminal 400. be able to.
- the traffic load on the communication network 3 can be suppressed.
- the business support device 300 may determine whether or not to notify the terminal 400 of the shortage based on the latest plurality of shortage detection information acquired from the shortage detection device 200. For example, the business support device 300 may determine whether or not to give a shortage notification by any of the following determination methods 1 and 2.
- the business support device 300 when the shortage detection information acquired before 12:15, 5 minutes, and 0 minutes, respectively, indicates "out of stock", the business support device 300 is out of stock at 12:15.
- the shortage detection information acquired 10 minutes before 12:15, 5 minutes before, and 0 minutes before indicates "no shortage”. It is determined that the out-of-stock notification will not be given at the timing of 12:15.
- the business support device 300 indicates that the shortage detection information acquired before 12:15:10 indicates “there is a shortage", and the shortage detection acquired before 5 minutes and 0 minutes before 12:15.
- the judgment of the shortage notification at the shortage notification timing at 12:15 is determined, and the shortage notification timing at 12:00 (previous shortage notification timing) is determined. The judgment is the same as the judgment of the shortage notification in the notification timing).
- ⁇ Judgment method 2 When the majority of the two or more recent shortage detection information acquired from the shortage detection device 200 indicates "out of stock”, the business support device 300 determines that the terminal 400 is notified of the shortage, and the second or more. When the majority of the above shortage detection information indicates "no shortage”, it is determined that the terminal 400 is not notified of the shortage. Alternatively, the business support device 300 determines that the terminal 400 is notified of the shortage when a predetermined number or more of the two or more latest shortage detection information acquired from the shortage detection device 200 indicates "out of stock”. Then, when a predetermined number or more of the two or more shortage detection information indicates "no shortage", it is determined that the terminal 400 is not notified of the shortage. It should be noted that the latest out-of-stock detection information may be prioritized, and the judgment may be made in consideration of the previous out-of-stock detection information.
- the "out of stock” or “no out of stock” indicated by the out of stock detection information generated by the out of stock detection device 200 may be incorrect due to the nature of image analysis. Therefore, as in the determination methods 1 and 2 described above, by determining whether or not to perform the shortage notification based on the plurality of shortage detection information, the reliability of the shortage notification to the terminal 400 is improved.
- FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a map UI in the terminal 400.
- the terminal 400 displays the map UI 2100 indicating the position of the shortage shelf on the store floor and the position of the shortage section on the shortage shelf on the display unit 405.
- the map UI 2100 includes a floor map image 2101, a shelf map image 2102, and out-of-stock product information 2103.
- the floor map image 2101 shows the position of the shortage shelf on the store floor.
- the floor map image 2101 shows the arrangement of display shelves on the store floor and shows the shortage shelves in a manner different from other display shelves. Missing shelves may be painted in a different color or pattern than other display shelves. Completely out of stock shelves may be painted in a different color or pattern than partially out of stock shelves. For example, as shown in FIG. 23, the missing shelves that are completely out of stock are painted in black, and the out-of-stock shelves that are partially out of stock are painted in diagonal lines.
- the shelf map image 2102 shows the position of the shortage section on the shortage shelf.
- the shelf map image 2102 shows the shortage section of the shortage shelf in a different manner from the other sections.
- the missing compartment may be painted in a different color or pattern than the other compartments.
- the complete shortage section may be painted in a different color or pattern than the partial missing section.
- the shortage section of the complete shortage is painted in black, and the shortage section of the partial shortage is painted in diagonal lines.
- the out-of-stock product information 2103 indicates the name of the product category of the out-of-stock product 2104 and the number of out-of-stock products 2105. For example, as shown in FIG. 23, in the shortage number 2105, the shortage number 2106A of the complete shortage and the shortage number 2106B of the partial shortage are shown separately.
- FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of the notification list UI in the terminal 400.
- the terminal 400 displays a notification list UI2200 showing a list of out-of-stock notifications on the display unit 405.
- the notification list UI 2200 includes the number of notifications 2201 of the day, the refined search field 2202, the notification setting button 2203, the non-input tab 2204, the input tab 2205, the notification off tab 2206, and the notification list 2207.
- the number of notifications 2201 on the day indicates the number of out-of-stock notifications received by the terminal 400 on the day.
- search conditions for narrowing down the notification list 2207 are input.
- search conditions related to elapsed time, shelf numbers, or product categories corresponding to the items in the notification list 2207 may be input.
- Notification setting button 2203 is a button for setting notification on or off.
- the non-input tab 2204 displays the notification list 2207 of the shortage notification for which no action has been taken yet.
- the number in parentheses of the blank tab 2204 indicates the number of out-of-stock notifications included in the notification list 2207 of the blank tab 2204.
- the entered tab 2205 displays the notification list 2207 of the shortage notification for which some action has already been performed.
- the number in parentheses of the entered tab 2205 indicates the number of out-of-stock notifications included in the notification list 2207 of the entered tab 2205.
- the notification off tab 2206 displays the notification list 2207 of the shortage notification that was not notified due to the notification off setting.
- the number in parentheses of the notification off-tab 2206 indicates the number of out-of-stock notifications included in the notification list 2207 of the notification off-tab 2206.
- the notification list 2207 displays the shortage notification in a list format.
- the notification list 2207 displays the status, elapsed time, shelf number, product category, and position as items related to the out-of-stock notification.
- -In the status an icon based on the elapsed time since receiving the out-of-stock notification is displayed. For example, the state displays icons of different colors depending on the elapsed time.
- -The elapsed time displays the elapsed time since the out-of-stock notification was received.
- -The shelf number of the out-of-stock shelf is displayed in the shelf number. The shelf number corresponds to the shelf ID described in the first embodiment.
- the product category the name of the product category of the out-of-stock product is displayed. Alternatively, the product name may be displayed in the product category.
- -The position of the shortage section on the shortage shelf is displayed in the position.
- FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of the notification detail UI in the terminal 400.
- the terminal 400 displays the notification detail UI 2300 showing the details of the selected out-of-stock notification on the display unit 405 as shown in FIG. 25.
- the notification detail UI 2300 includes a shelf map image 2301, a shortage notification detailed information 2302, and an action input field 2303.
- the shelf map image 2301 shows the position of the shortage section on the shortage shelf.
- the shortage notification detailed information 2302 shows detailed information regarding the shortage notification.
- the shortage notification detailed information 2302 indicates, for example, a color band 2311, a shelf number 2312, a product category 2313, a position 2314, an elapsed time 2315, a final detection time 2316, and a notification setting 2317.
- -The color band 2311 indicates whether the shortage notification is a complete shortage or a partial shortage in different colors.
- -Shelves number 2312 indicates the shelf number of the out-of-stock shelf.
- -Product category 2313 indicates the name of the product category of the out-of-stock product. Alternatively, the product category 2313 may indicate a product name.
- -Position 2314 indicates the position of the shortage section on the shortage shelf.
- the elapsed time 2315 indicates the elapsed time since the out-of-stock notification was received.
- -Final detection time 2316 indicates the final time when a shortage is detected.
- -Notification setting 2317 is a button for setting on or off of notification for each product.
- the action input field 2303 accepts the input of the action for the shortage notification.
- the action input field 2303 has an option 2321 of "replenishment” and an option 2322 of "not replenishing".
- the option 2321 of "replenishment” may further include sub-options of "currently being dealt with” and “replenishment completed”.
- the person in charge 2 may select one of the sub-options in the "replenishment” option 2321 here when replenishing or replenishing the product corresponding to the out-of-stock notification.
- the "not replenished” option 2322 may further include sub-options "out of stock", “busy”, “intentionally vacant", and "with customer”.
- the person in charge 2 may select one of the sub-options in the "do not replenish” option 2322 here when the product corresponding to the shortage notification is not replenished or cannot be replenished.
- the person in charge 2 selects an appropriate option from the options included in the above action input field 2303 and presses (touches) the enter button 2304.
- the terminal 400 transmits the content of the option selected by the person in charge 2 to the business support device 300 as an action of the person in charge 2 in response to the shortage notification.
- the business support device 300 can manage the action of the person in charge 2 in response to the shortage notification.
- FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a modified example of the display shelf.
- the shortage detection system of the present disclosure is not limited to the display shelf 10 of the type in which products are arranged in the back direction, but can also be applied to the display shelf 10 of the type in which products are arranged or stacked on a flat surface as shown in FIG.
- the camera device 100 for photographing the display shelf 10 is installed at a position where the display shelf 10 is photographed from above, as shown in FIG. 26.
- the compartment 30 is set with respect to the display shelf 10 viewed from above.
- FIG. 27 is a diagram for explaining an example of a process of detecting an external image of a product from an image of a display shelf.
- FIG. 28 is a diagram for explaining an example of a process of generating the shelf allocation information 210 based on the detection result of the appearance image of the product.
- FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of the generated shelving allocation information 210.
- the business support device 300 shows an external image of the product included in an image (hereinafter referred to as “first shelf image”) 3000 of the display shelf 10 in which the product is displayed without missing or misplaced products, and the external image shows the external image.
- the shelf allocation information 210 is generated by associating the product information such as the product name of the product with the position of the arrangement of the product shown in the external image on the display shelf 10, and is stored in the memory 302. For example, the business support device 300 generates the shelf allocation information 210 by the processing of the next steps S101 to S102.
- Step S101 The business support device 300 detects an external image of each product from the first shelf image 3000. At this time, as shown in FIG. 27, the business support device 300 displays an image in which the frame 3001 surrounding the detected appearance image of each product is superimposed on the first shelf image 3000 on the display unit 405 of the terminal 400. You may. As shown in FIG. 27, the business support device 300 displays the frame 3001 of the appearance image of a common product in a common mode (for example, the same color or pattern), and displays the frame 3001 of the appearance image of different products in a different mode (for example). It may be displayed in a different color or pattern). In FIG. 27, different aspects of the frame 3001 of the external image are represented by different line types.
- the business support device 300 has an external image detected in step S101, a display position (for example, a section 30) on the display shelf 10 of the product indicated by the external image, and a product name of the product indicated by the external image. It is stored in the memory 302 in association with each other. At this time, as shown in FIG. 28, the business support device 300 may detect the number of rows of the same appearance image (that is, the same product) in the section 30 (hereinafter referred to as “the number of product rows”). As shown in FIG. 28, the business support device 300 superimposes the frame 3002 of the section 30 on the first shelf image 3000, and superimposes the number of product rows 3003 in the section 30 on the frame 3002 of the section 30.
- shelf allocation image may be displayed on the display unit 405 of the terminal 400.
- the business support device 300 since each section 30 is identified by the shelf number, the shelf step, and the shelf position, the business support device 300 includes the shelf number, the shelf step, and the shelf position (that is, the section 30) as shown in FIG. 29.
- the correspondence relationship with the product name of the product indicated by the appearance image detected in the section 30 may be stored in the memory 302 as the shelf allocation information 210.
- the business support device 300 may display the frames of different sections 30 in different modes (for example, different colors or patterns). In FIG. 28, different aspects of the frame of the section 30 are represented by different line types.
- the business support device 300 may include the number of stocks of each product in the shelf allocation information 210.
- the business support device 300 for example, generates the above-mentioned shelf allocation information 210 before the store opens. At that time, as described above, the business support device 300 superimposes the frame 3002 of each section 30 and the number of product rows 3003 in the section 30 on the first shelf image 3000 as shown in FIG. 28. May be displayed on the terminal 400 of the store manager. As a result, the store manager can efficiently confirm from the shelf allocation image displayed on the terminal 400 whether or not the products are correctly displayed on the display shelf 10 before the store opens.
- FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a display example of a shelf image in which a shortage is detected.
- FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a display example of a shelf image in which misplacement is detected.
- the business support device 300 detects an external image stored in the memory 302 from an image (hereinafter referred to as “second shelf image”) 3100 obtained by taking a picture of the display shelf 10 after the first shelf image 3000, and uses the detection result as the result. Based on this, the notification regarding the placement of the product indicated by the appearance image (for example, the shortage notification and / or the misplacement notification) is controlled.
- misplacement means that the goods are placed in a section 30 different from the section 30 in which the goods should be originally placed.
- the business support device 300 detects a product shortage and misplacement by the processing of the next steps S201 to S203, and gives a shortage notification and a misplacement notification.
- the order of execution of steps S202 and S203 below may be interchanged.
- Step S201 The business support device 300 detects an external image of each product from the second shelf image 3100.
- Step S202 When the business support device 300 detects in the second shelf image 3100 that the appearance image stored in the memory 302 does not exist at the position of the product arrangement (for example, the section 30) indicated by the appearance image. , It is determined that the product shown in the appearance image is out of stock. At this time, as shown in FIG. 30, the business support device 300 is a shelf in which a frame (hereinafter referred to as “out of stock frame”) 3101 surrounding a portion detected as a shortage is superimposed on the second shelf image 3100. An image (hereinafter referred to as “out of stock shelf image”) may be displayed on the display unit 405 of the terminal 400. Further, when the business support device 300 determines that the product is out of stock, the business support device 300 may notify the terminal 400 of the shortage as described in the first or second embodiment.
- a frame hereinafter referred to as “out of stock frame”
- An image hereinafter referred to as "out of stock shelf image”
- the business support device 300 may notify the terminal 400 of the shortage as described
- Step S203 In the second shelf image 3100, the business support device 300 has a position (for example, a different section) in which the appearance image stored in the memory 302 is different from the position (for example, the section 30) of the product arrangement indicated by the appearance image.
- the business support device 300 superimposes a frame (hereinafter referred to as “misplaced frame”) 3102 surrounding the appearance image detected as misplacement on the second shelf image 3100.
- the shelf image (hereinafter referred to as “misplaced shelf image”) may be displayed on the display unit 405 of the terminal 400.
- the business support device 300 may give a misplacement notification in the same manner as the shortage notification described in the first or second embodiment.
- the business support device 300 can generate and display a shortage shelf image and a misplaced shelf image that can visually confirm the positions of missing items and misplaced items.
- the business support device 300 may superimpose the shortage frame 3101 and the misplaced frame 3102 on one second shelf image 3100.
- the missing item frame 3101 may be displayed in a mode (for example, a different color) different from that of the misplaced frame 3102.
- the business support device 300 can display a shelf image that can visually distinguish between a missing item and a misplaced position.
- the business support device 300 for example, carries out the above-mentioned shortage notification during the business hours of the store.
- the store staff can quickly notice the section 30 of the display shelf 10 where the shortage has occurred through the terminal 400 during the business hours, and can quickly perform the work of replenishing the shortage. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the loss of sales opportunities in the store.
- the business support device 300 implements the above-mentioned misplacement notification not only during the business hours of the store but also after the business hours of the store.
- the store staff can quickly know the section 30 of the display shelf 10 in which the misplacement exists after the business hours, and the time required for organizing the display shelf 10 can be shortened.
- AI Artificial Intelligence
- the business support device 300 detects the appearance image of each product from the first shelf image 3000 and the second shelf image 3100 by using a learning device that has learned the appearance image of each product in advance.
- processing of the business support device 300 described above may be read as the processing of the shortage detection device 200.
- processing of the business support device 300 may be read as a cooperative processing of the business support device 300 and the shortage detection device 200.
- the appearance image of the above-mentioned product is not limited to the appearance image of the package of the product, and may be the appearance image of the unpackaged product such as vegetables or fruits.
- the product of the display shelf 10 according to the present disclosure is not limited to the product of the supermarket, and may be, for example, a book in a bookstore, a part in a factory, a corrugated cardboard in a warehouse, or the like.
- the business support device 300 may send a misplacement notification to the terminal 400.
- the terminal 400 may display the notification image 2001 indicating the misplacement notification in the notification UI 2000 as shown in FIG. 22.
- the terminal 400 may display the position of the shelf in which the misplacement is detected in the map UI 2100 as shown in FIG. 23.
- the terminal 400 may display the UI as shown in FIG. 11 or 12 instead of the UI shown in FIG. 22 or 23.
- the business support device (300) according to the third embodiment has an external image of at least one article in the first shelf image (3000) obtained by photographing the display shelf (10) of the article, and the display shelf of the article indicated by the external image.
- the appearance image stored in the storage unit is detected from the storage unit (302) that stores the arrangement position in association with each other and the second shelf image (3100) in which the display shelf is photographed after the first shelf image. Then, based on the detection result, the processing unit (301) for controlling the notification regarding the arrangement of the articles indicated by the external appearance image is provided.
- the appearance image detected from the first shelf image is used to detect the arrangement of articles in the second shelf image taken after the first shelf image, and the arrangement of articles is detected based on the detection result. Since the notification regarding the placement of the goods can be controlled, the business support device can control the notification regarding the placement of the goods without manually creating the shelf allocation information indicating the correct placement of the goods on the display shelf in advance.
- the processing unit (301) detects in the second shelf image (3100) that the appearance image stored in the storage unit (302) does not exist at the position of the arrangement associated with the appearance image
- the processing unit (301) detects it. You may notify that the article shown in the external image is out of stock.
- the notification may include information indicating the identification information of the article shown in the external image and information indicating the position of the detected arrangement (that is, the position of the missing item).
- the business support device can, for example, notify the terminal of shortage without manually creating the shelf allocation information indicating the correct arrangement of the articles on the display shelf.
- the processing unit (301) indicates that in the second shelf image (3100), the appearance image stored in the storage unit (302) exists at a position different from the position of the arrangement associated with the appearance image. If detected, it may notify that the article shown in the external image is placed in the wrong position.
- the notification may include identification information of the article indicated by the appearance image and information indicating a different detected position (that is, a position of misplacement).
- the business support device can, for example, notify the terminal of misplacement without manually creating shelf allocation information indicating the correct placement of the goods on the display shelf in advance.
- FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the business support device 300 according to the fourth embodiment.
- the business support device 300 has the same configuration as that shown in FIG.
- the management information 310 may not include at least a part of the information shown in FIG. 7.
- the management information 310 may not include the shelf allocation advice handling history information shown in FIG. 7.
- the business support device 300 receives the inventory information 4002 from a predetermined inventory management system that manages the inventory of the store through the receiving unit 303B, and stores the inventory information 4002 in the storage 304, for example.
- the business support device 300 When the business support device 300 receives the shortage detection information from the shortage detection device 200, the business support device 300 notifies (transmits) an alert (information) to the terminal 400 of the person in charge 2 of the display shelf 10 in which the shortage has occurred. At this time, the business support device 300 may determine the alert notification timing based on the alert status 4001 in the memory 302.
- the alert status 4001 is information used to control the alert notification of the out-of-stock product. Examples of alerts include alerts that prompt the replenishment of missing items and partially missing items (hereinafter referred to as "replenishment alerts"), and alerts that prompt the advance display of partially missing items (hereinafter referred to as "advanced items alerts"). Will be.
- the process of determining the alert notification timing will be described in detail.
- FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the alert determination process according to the fourth embodiment.
- the business support device 300 executes the alert determination process for each product that can be displayed on the display shelf 10.
- the business support device 300 determines whether or not the alert status 4001 of the product conforms to any of "not applicable”, “waiting for arrival on the day”, or "under substitution” (S101).
- the alert status 4001 "not applicable” indicates that the out-of-stock product (may be a partially out-of-stock product) is out of the target of the alert notification.
- Alert status 4001 "Waiting for arrival on the day” indicates that the out-of-stock item will be received on the same day.
- Alert status 4001 "Replacement” indicates that another product is being displayed as a substitute for the out-of-stock product.
- the other product is preferably another product displayed on the same display shelf 10.
- the business support device 300 determines whether or not the product is out of stock. (S102). For example, when the business support device 300 receives the shortage detection information from the shortage detection device 200, it determines that the product is out of stock, and when it does not receive the shortage detection information, it determines that the product is not out of stock. ..
- the business support device 300 determines that the product is not out of stock (S102: NO)
- the business support device 300 executes a non-deficient product handling process (S400), and ends this process (END).
- S400 non-deficient product handling process
- END ends this process
- the business support device 300 determines whether or not the out-of-stock product is completely out of stock (S103).
- the business support device 300 When the out-of-stock product is not completely out of stock (that is, when the out-of-stock product is partially out of stock, or when the out-of-stock product is not judged to require replenishment) (S103: NO), the business support device 300 performs a partial out-of-stock handling process. Execute (S300) and end this process (END). The details of the partial shortage handling process will be described later (see FIG. 35).
- FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the complete shortage handling process according to the fourth embodiment.
- FIG. 34 corresponds to a detailed description of the process of S200 in FIG. 33.
- the business support device 300 refers to the inventory information 4002 and determines whether or not the inventory of the out-of-stock product exists (S201). When the inventory of the out-of-stock product exists (S201: YES), the business support device 300 executes the following processes S202 to S204.
- the business support device 300 creates an alert list for out-of-stock products (S202).
- the alert list is a list of a plurality of alerts notified to the terminal 400 of the person in charge 2.
- the business support device 300 collects alerts for a plurality of out-of-stock products belonging to a common category into one list to generate an alert list.
- the business support device 300 may generate an alert list by arranging the plurality of alerts in descending order of priority for replenishment.
- the business support device 300 notifies the terminal 400 of the person in charge 2 of the display shelf 10 in which the shortage is detected, to notify the alert (replenishment alert) for replenishing the missing product, including the generated alert list (S203). ..
- the business support device 300 changes the alert status 4001 of the out-of-stock product to "alert in progress" (S204), and ends this process (RETURN).
- the person in charge 2 who has been notified of the replenishment alert may replenish the shortage product to the display shelf 10 in the order indicated by the alert list included in the replenishment alert.
- the business support device 300 determines whether or not the out-of-stock product arrives on the same day (S205). For example, the business support device 300 confirms the arrival product and the arrival time at the corresponding store specified by the SCM (Supply Chain Management) related system, and makes the determination.
- SCM Service Chain Management
- Examples of SCM-related systems include an ordering system, a manufacturing management system, and an operation management system.
- the business support device 300 changes the alert status 4001 of the product to "waiting for arrival on the day” (S206), and ends this process (RETURN).
- the business support device 300 determines whether or not the out-of-stock product is the target of the alternative layout (S207).
- the business support device 300 changes the alert status 4001 of the product to "not applicable” (S208), and ends this process (RETURN).
- the business support device 300 executes the following processes of S209 to S211.
- the business support device 300 generates an alternative layout showing a shelf allocation layout for displaying other products as a substitute for the out-of-stock product (S209).
- the business support device 300 issues an alert (hereinafter referred to as “layout change alert”) for urging the display shelf 10 in which the shortage product has occurred to be changed to the shelf allocation indicated by the alternative layout, by the person in charge 2 of the display shelf 10. Notify the terminal 400 (S210).
- the layout change alert includes an alternative layout generated in S209.
- the business support device 300 changes the alert status 4001 of the product to "substitute” (S211), and ends this process (RETURN).
- the first alert status 4001 of the product displayed as a substitute for the out-of-stock product may be set to "alert in progress".
- the person in charge 2 who has been notified of the layout change alert may sort the products on the display shelf 10 based on the alternative layout included in the layout change alert.
- the business support device 300 does not notify the terminal 400 of the replenishment alert when the out-of-stock product is out of stock. As a result, it is possible to prevent a replenishment alert from being notified when the stock of the out-of-stock product does not exist and replenishment is not possible. Further, when the out-of-stock product is in stock, the business support device 300 notifies the terminal 400 of a replenishment alert. As a result, when the stock of the out-of-stock product is in stock and replenishment is possible, the replenishment alert is notified, so that the person in charge 2 can receive the notification of the replenishment alert and quickly replenish the out-of-stock product.
- FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the partial shortage handling process according to the fourth embodiment.
- FIG. 35 corresponds to a detailed description of the process of S300 in FIG. 33.
- the business support device 300 creates an alert list for products that are partially out of stock (S301).
- the business support device 300 sends an alert (previous alert) urging the arrangement of products so that the partial shortage is resolved to the terminal 400 of the person in charge 2 of the display shelf 10 in which the partial shortage is detected.
- Notify S302
- the business support device 300 changes the alert status 4001 of the partially out of stock product to "alert in progress" (S303), and ends this process (RETURN).
- the person in charge 2 who has been notified of the advance alert may arrange the arrangement of the partially missing products in the order indicated by the alert list included in the advance alert and eliminate the partial shortage. For example, the person in charge 2 moves the partially missing product remaining on the shelf to an empty space in front of or next to the shelf to eliminate the partially missing product.
- FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the missing item handling process according to the fourth embodiment.
- FIG. 36 corresponds to a detailed description of the process of S400 in FIG. 33.
- the business support device 300 determines whether or not the product alert status 4001 is "alert in progress" (S401). When the product alert status 4001 is "alert in progress” (S401: YES), the business support device 300 changes the product alert status 4001 to "completed” (S402) and ends this process (RETURN). When the product alert status 4001 is not “alert in progress” (S401: NO), the business support device 300 changes the product alert status 4001 to "normal” (S403) and ends this process (RETURN).
- the above processing of S402 is executed for a product that is determined not to be out of stock (NO) in S102 and that the alert status 4001 is determined to be "alert in progress" (YES) in S401. That is, the process of S402 is a product in which a shortage occurs and the alert status 4001 is updated to "alert in progress" in S204 (S401: YES), and then the product is replenished by the person in charge 2. This is executed for the product determined in S102 that the shortage has been resolved (S102: NO). Therefore, in S402, the business support device 300 changes the alert status 4001 of the product to "completed” indicating that the replenishment of the product is completed.
- the replenishment is automatically reflected in the alert status 4001. That is, even if the person in charge 2 does not input to the business support device 300 that the replenishment has been performed after replenishing the missing product, the elimination of the shortage is automatically reflected in the business support device 300.
- FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the arrival handling process according to the fourth embodiment.
- the business support device 300 executes the arrival handling process for each of the received products at the timing when the products are received.
- the business support device 300 determines whether or not the alert status 4001 of the product is "waiting for arrival” (S501).
- the business support device 300 executes the following processes S502 to S504.
- the business support device 300 creates a picking list for products whose alert status 4001 is "waiting for arrival” (S502).
- a product whose alert status 4001 is "waiting for arrival” will be referred to as a backordered product.
- the picking list as described in S202 of FIG. 34, the products to be picked may be grouped into a common category or arranged in order of priority.
- the business support device 300 notifies the terminal 400 of the person in charge 2 of the display shelf 10 of the backordered product of the replenishment alert including the generated picking list (S503).
- the business support device 300 changes the alert status 4001 of the backordered product to "alert in progress” (S504), and ends this process (END).
- the business support device 300 determines whether or not the alert status 4001 of the product is "substitute” (S505).
- the business support device 300 ends this process without changing the alert status 4001 (END).
- the business support device 300 executes the following processes S506 to S508.
- a product whose alert status 4001 is "substitute” is referred to as a product being replaced.
- the business support device 300 generates an alternative restoration layout for restoring the changed shelf allocation based on the alternative layout to the original shelf allocation (S506).
- the business support device 300 notifies the terminal 400 of the person in charge 2 of the display shelf 10 to be restored with a layout restoration alert prompting to restore the shelf allocation changed based on the alternative layout to the original shelf allocation (the terminal 400 of the person in charge 2 of the display shelf 10 to be restored).
- the layout restore alert includes an alternative restore layout generated in S506.
- the person in charge 2 who has been notified of the layout restoration alert may sort the products on the display shelf 10 based on the alternative restoration layout included in the layout restoration alert.
- the business support device 300 changes the alert status 4001 of the product being replaced to "alert in progress” (S508), and ends this process (END).
- a replenishment alert including a picking list is notified in S503 at the timing when a missing item that does not exist in inventory and is backordered arrives. Therefore, the person in charge 2 can directly pick the received shortage product based on the picking list without moving it to the inventory and replenish it to the shortage shelf. This improves the efficiency of the work of replenishing the missing products.
- the person in charge 2 described above may be a person in charge of the display shelf 10 of a predetermined product category.
- product categories include a vegetable category, a meat category, a beverage category, a frozen food category, and a miscellaneous goods category.
- the product category may be read as the product area.
- the above-mentioned determination of whether or not the product is in stock may be determined based on the logical inventory quantity of the product.
- the number of arrivals may also take into account the arrival time. For example, when calculating the logical inventory quantity of products to be received after the opening time, the arrival quantity after the opening time may be substituted into the arrival quantity of the above calculation formula.
- the adjustment value may be determined according to the characteristics of the product.
- the adjustment value may be 0, a positive value, or a negative value.
- the adjustment value of the goods specially displayed in the special corner may be a negative value.
- the adjustment value of the product picked up by a large number of customers during the in-store migration may be a negative value.
- the adjustment value of the product that can be stored for a long time and is in stock more than the number of inventories may be a positive value.
- Alerts may be collectively listed and notified in units of display shelves 10. Further, when a plurality of alerts exist, the alert of the product having a high demand variable f shown in the fifth embodiment described later may be prioritized. For example, the business support device 300 may notify the terminal 400 of a list of alerts arranged in descending order of priority. The employee may look at the list notified to the terminal 400 and respond in order from the alert on the list.
- the business support device 300 gives priority to the work on the display shelves 10 according to the total size of the demand variables f of each product displayed on the display shelves 10. You may decide the degree.
- the list of alerts indicating the priority of the above response work may be generated in units of display shelves 10. In this case, prioritization across at least two display shelves 10 does not have to be performed.
- the business support device (300) receives shortage detection information indicating a shelf and an article in which a missing item or a partial missing item is detected, and inventory information (4002) indicating an inventory status of the article. Based on the inventory status of the receiving unit (303B) and the article in which the shortage is detected shown in the inventory information (4002), the shelf of the article in which the missing item or the partial missing item shown in the missing item detection information is detected ( A processing unit (301) that controls the transmission (notification) timing of information (replenishment alert) prompting replenishment to 10) is provided. As a result, it is possible to control the notification timing of the replenishment alert of the article according to the inventory status of the article in which the shortage is detected.
- the processing unit (301) does not have to notify the replenishment alert when there is no stock of the article in which the shortage or the partial shortage is detected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the replenishment alert from being notified when the out-of-stock product is out of stock and replenishment is not possible, and the efficiency of the out-of-stock handling work of the person in charge 2 is improved.
- the processing unit (301) may notify a replenishment alert when there is an inventory of an article for which a shortage or a partial shortage has been detected.
- a replenishment alert is notified when the out-of-stock product is in stock and can be replenished, so that the efficiency of the out-of-stock handling work of the person in charge 2 is improved.
- the processing unit (301) does not have an article in which a missing item or a partial missing item is detected on the shelf (10) and an item in which a missing item or a partial missing item is detected is present, the processing unit (301) has an inventory. You may be notified of replenishment alerts. As a result, when a product that is out of stock or partially out of stock exists on the shelf 10 and can be replenished, a replenishment alert is notified, so that the efficiency of the out-of-stock handling work of the person in charge 2 is improved.
- the processing unit (301) prompts the organization of the articles existing on the shelf (10) (previous display). Alerts) may be notified (sent). As a result, when a shortage or a partial shortage occurs on the shelf 10, an advance alert is notified, so that the person in charge 2 can quickly resolve the partial shortage.
- the processing unit (301) when the processing unit (301) does not have the inventory of the article for which the shortage or the partial shortage is detected and the inventory of the other article existing on the shelf (10) exists, the processing unit (301) puts the other article.
- Information (layout change alert) urging replenishment may be sent (notified) on behalf of the article.
- the layout change alert is notified when there is no inventory of the article for which the shortage or partial shortage is detected on the shelf 10 and the inventory of other articles existing on the shelf 10 is present.
- the person in charge 2 can replenish other articles in place of the missing articles.
- FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the business support device 300 according to the fifth embodiment.
- the business support device 300 has the same configuration as that shown in FIG.
- the management information 310 may not include at least a part of the information shown in FIG. 7.
- the management information 310 may not include the shelf allocation advice handling history information shown in FIG. 7.
- the business support device 300 automatically creates a shelf allocation layout 5003 that is expected to improve profits based on the sales history information 5001 of each product obtained from the POS system and the shortage history information 5002 included in the management information 310. Generate.
- the shortage history information 5002 may be generated based on the past shortage detection result.
- the process of automatically generating the shelf layout layout 5003 will be described in detail.
- FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the shelf allocation layout generation process according to the fifth embodiment.
- the business support device 300 calculates the demand variable f of each product to be displayed on each display shelf 10 in the area (S601).
- the demand variable f is a value indicating the magnitude of the demand for the product, and may differ for each store and product. The calculation method of the demand variable f will be described later.
- the business support device 300 calculates the inventory variable g of each product to be displayed on each display shelf 10 in the area (S602).
- the inventory variable g is a value indicating an amount that can hold the product as inventory, and may differ depending on the store and the product. The method of calculating the inventory variable g will be described later.
- the business support device 300 calculates the sales point C of each product to be displayed on each display shelf 10 in the area (S603).
- the selling point C is a value indicating the high selling ability of the product itself, and may differ for each product. The details of the calculation method of the sales point C will be described later.
- the business support device 300 calculates the position point D of each display shelf 10 and each shelf stage in the area (S604).
- the position point D is a value indicating the high selling capacity of each display shelf 10 and the display position of each shelf, and may be different for each display shelf 10 and each shelf. The details of the calculation method of the position point D will be described later.
- the business support device 300 generates a shelf allocation layout 5003 for each display shelf 10 in the area based on the sales point C of each product and the position point D of each display shelf 10 on which the product is displayed and each shelf stage. (S605). The details of the method of generating the shelf layout layout 5003 will be described later.
- the business support device 300 displays the generated shelf layout layout 5003 (S606).
- the person in charge 2 modifies the displayed shelf layout layout 5003 as necessary (S607).
- the business support device 300 reflects the shelf layout layout 5003 on the display shelf 10 in the actual area (S608). For example, the business support device 300 rewrites the contents of the electronic shelf label on the video rail of the display shelf 10 based on the shelf allocation layout 5003.
- the person in charge 2 displays the products on the display shelf 10 in the area where the shelf layout layout 5003 is reflected according to the shelf layout layout 5003 (S609). For example, the person in charge 2 displays the product indicated by the electronic shelf label according to the position of the rewritten electronic shelf label.
- FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining an example of a method of calculating the demand variable f according to the fifth embodiment.
- the business support device 300 divides a map having the product sales record x on the horizontal axis and the product shortage record y on the vertical axis, and divides the sales record x by a predetermined threshold value T1 and lacks. By classifying the product performance y by a predetermined threshold value T2, it is divided into four segments.
- the sales record x of the product may be obtained from the sales history information 5001.
- the sales record x may be the total number of products sold in a predetermined period (for example, one week). Alternatively, the sales record x may be a deviation value based on the average total number of sales of the products.
- the product shortage record y may be obtained from the shortage history information 5002.
- the out-of-stock record y may be the number of out-of-stock occurrences (that is, the out-of-stock occurrence frequency) of the product in a predetermined period (for example, one week).
- the threshold value T1 may be arbitrarily set by the user, or may be set according to the average total number of products sold in a predetermined period.
- the threshold value T2 may be arbitrarily set by the user, or may be set according to the average number of product shortages in a predetermined period.
- a segment in which the sales record x is the threshold value T1 or more and the shortage record y is the threshold value T2 or more is referred to as a first segment.
- a segment in which the sales record x is less than the threshold value T1 and the shortage record y is the threshold value T2 or more is referred to as a second segment.
- a segment in which the sales record x is equal to or higher than the threshold value T1 and the shortage record y is less than the threshold value T2 is referred to as a third segment.
- a segment in which the sales record x is less than the threshold value T1 and the shortage record y is less than the threshold value T2 is referred to as a fourth segment.
- the number of map divisions and the division method are not limited to the above example.
- the business support device 300 may increase the number of threshold values of at least one of the sales record x and the shortage record y, and divide the map into more than four segments.
- the business support device 300 has a threshold straight line such that the shortage record y increases as the sales record x increases, and a threshold straight line such that the shortage record y decreases as the sales record x increases. You may set and divide the map into multiple segments by the straight lines of those thresholds. In this case, the shape of the divided segment can be different from the shape of the rectangle.
- the product is plotted in any of the first segment to the fourth segment based on the sales record x and the shortage record y of the product.
- ⁇ indicates a shortage coefficient, and may be a value determined by the segment in which the product is plotted.
- the shortage coefficient ⁇ 1 of the first segment, the shortage coefficient ⁇ 2 of the second segment, the shortage coefficient ⁇ 3 of the third segment, and the shortage coefficient ⁇ 4 of the fourth segment have the following relationships. good. ⁇ 1 ⁇ ⁇ 2 > ⁇ 3 ⁇ ⁇ 4 > 0
- ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2 may be set to a value larger than 1, and ⁇ 3 and ⁇ 4 may be set to a value of 1 or less. The reason is as follows.
- ⁇ 1 is set to a value larger than 1.
- the products plotted in the second segment have a small sales record x but a large shortage record y, so there is a high possibility that the number of sales will increase by reducing the shortage. That is, since the demand for the product is expected to be higher than that indicated by the sales record x, ⁇ 2 is set to a value larger than 1.
- the products plotted in the third segment have a large sales record x, but a small shortage record y, so it is unlikely that the number of sales will increase any more. That is, since it is assumed that the sales record x indicates the current demand of the product, ⁇ 3 is set to a value of 1 or less.
- ⁇ 4 is set to a value of 1 or less.
- the demand variable f of the product may be calculated according to the strength of the positive correlation between the frequency of shortage of the product and the number of sales of the product.
- the strength of the correlation between the frequency of shortages and the number of units sold may be analyzed, for example, by multiple regression analysis.
- the inventory variable g is calculated based on the size of the backyard of the goods. For example, the inventory variable g of a product is calculated larger as the size of the backyard in which the product is held as inventory is larger.
- the size of the backyard may differ depending on whether the type of product is, for example, normal temperature, refrigeration required, or freezing required. This is because products at room temperature, products that require refrigeration, and products that require freezing are stored in different backyards.
- the size of the backyard may be shared by multiple products of the same type. In this case, a plurality of products of the same type are stored so as not to exceed the upper limit of the size of the backyard.
- the inventory variable g may be calculated based on the average daily sales volume of the goods.
- the selling point C of the product may be calculated by the following formula 2.
- C f ⁇ g ⁇ P ⁇ U ...
- Equation 2 f indicates a demand variable of the product for which C is to be calculated.
- g indicates an inventory variable of the product for which C is to be calculated.
- P indicates the price of the product for which C is calculated.
- U indicates the number of SKUs (Stock Keeping Units) to be calculated by C.
- the sales point C becomes larger as the demand is higher and the price is higher. Further, since the demand variable f includes the out-of-stock coefficient ⁇ as described above, the selling point C becomes a larger value as the product has a higher out-of-stock frequency. Further, the selling point C becomes a larger value as the product has a higher inventory capacity.
- An upper limit may be set for the sales point C.
- the business support device 300 may set the upper limit value as the sales point C.
- the upper limit may be set based on the size of the area where the goods are displayed. For example, the larger the area size, the larger the upper limit is set.
- the upper limit value may be set based on the supply point of the product.
- the supply point is a value indicating the supply capacity of the product.
- the supply point may be calculated based on the high efficiency of SCM (Supply Chain Management).
- the efficiency of SCM may be calculated based on the manufacturing capacity of the product and the distribution capacity. For example, the larger the supply point, the larger the upper limit is set.
- the supply point may be a value that becomes larger as the value of "quantity x profit” that can be realized by one order is higher.
- the profit may take into account the actual value of past discounts.
- the initial value of the sales point C of the new product may be the total value of the supply point and the inventory point of the new product.
- FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining an example of a method of calculating a position point according to the fifth embodiment.
- Position point D is assigned to each display shelf 10 installed in the area.
- the position point D may be different depending on the position of the display shelf 10.
- the display shelf 10 near the flow line entrance to the area may be assigned a larger position point D than the display shelf 10 near the flow line exit of the area.
- the position point D assigned to the display shelf 10 may be distributed to each shelf of the display shelf 10.
- the ratio of the position points D distributed to each shelf may differ depending on the ease of selling the position of the shelf. For example, if a shelf slightly below the customer's line of sight (for example, 120 cm to 130 cm) is the easiest to sell, the percentage of position point D assigned to that shelf is the position assigned to the shelf above the customer's line of sight. It may be larger than the ratio of point D.
- the position, height, width, etc. of the shelf where the product is most easily put can change depending on the product category, the shape of the shelf, and the like.
- the position of the bottom is the easiest to sell.
- the largest number of position points D may be allocated to the lowest position.
- the business support device 300 As shown in FIG. 41, among the position points "100" assigned to the area, "50” is set to the display shelf 10A near the flow line entrance, and “30” is set to the middle of the flow line. “20” is assigned to the display shelf 10B and the display shelf 10C near the flow line exit. Then, in the business support device 300, among the position points "50” assigned to the display shelf 10A, "10” is assigned to the first shelf and "30” is assigned to the second shelf, which is the easiest to sell. 20 ”is assigned to the third shelf. As shown in FIG. 41, the business support device 300 also assigns position points to the display shelves 10B and the display shelves 10C to each shelf stage. As a result, the position point D is assigned to each shelf.
- the business support device 300 determines an area for displaying products belonging to the product category for each product category.
- the business support device 300 generates a shelf layout layout 5003 for optimally arranging the products displayed in the area.
- a shelf layout layout 5003 for optimally arranging the products displayed in the area.
- the sales point C is associated with each product, and the position point D is assigned to each shelf of the display shelf 10.
- the business support device 300 calculates the total of each product point F when each product to be displayed in the area is displayed on each shelf of each display shelf 10 in the area. That is, the business support device 300 calculates the total of the product points F of each product displayed in the area. Hereinafter, the total is referred to as an "area total value".
- the business support device 300 automatically generates a shelf layout 5003 for an area so that the total area value is maximized. For example, the business support device 300 prototypes various patterns of shelf allocation layouts 5003, compares the area total values of the prototype shelf allocation layouts 5003, and selects the shelf allocation layout 5003 having the maximum area total value.
- the business support device 300 may provide a function for manually setting a section 30 for displaying a specific product in the shelf layout layout 5003. For example, the person in charge 2 manually sets the section 30 for displaying a specific product in the shelf layout layout 5003 based on an instruction from the store or the head office. In this case, the business support device 300 may execute the automatic generation process of the shelf allocation layout 5003 by excluding the manually set product and the section 30.
- the business support device 300 may provide a function for preferentially arranging a product having a designated product characteristic on a shelf with a high position point. For example, when the person in charge 2 specifies that the standard product is prioritized, the business support device 300 preferentially arranges the product having the product characteristic of "standard product" on the shelf with the higher position point D, and puts the shelf on the shelf.
- the split layout 5003 may be generated.
- areas where special events are held such as special corners, may be excluded from the generation of the shelf layout layout 5003.
- ⁇ Change of shelf layout> 42 and 43 are diagrams for explaining a modified example of the shelf layout layout 5003.
- a product having a relatively large sales point C is represented by a horizontal line fill
- a product having a relatively small sales point C is represented by a pointillist fill.
- the upper figure shows the original shelf layout layout 5003, and the lower figure shows the newly generated shelf layout layout 5003.
- the section 30A of the product having a relatively large selling point C and the section 30A in which the product having a relatively small selling point C are arranged The shelf allocation layout 5003 enlarged in the direction of 30B (leftward) is displayed.
- the business support device 300 may display an arrow 5004 indicating a direction in which the section 30A is expanded.
- the upper figure shows the original shelf layout layout 5003
- the lower figure shows the newly generated shelf layout layout 5003.
- the product having a relatively large selling point C arranged in the section 30C is replaced with the selling point C arranged in the section 30D.
- the shelf allocation layout 5003 replaced with the relatively small product of is displayed.
- an arrow 5005 indicating the replacement of goods between the compartments 30C and the compartments 30D may be displayed.
- the product may be associated with basic product information indicating the basic information of the product.
- the basic product information may include the FACE size (height x width x depth) of the product, the release date of the product, the expiration date of the product, and the product category.
- the product category may have a plurality of layers, if necessary.
- the business support device 300 may correct the sales point C by using the basic product information.
- the display shelf 10 may be associated with basic shelf information regarding the size and position of the display shelf 10.
- the shelf basic information may include information indicating the width, height, and depth of each shelf, and information indicating the expandability of the shelf.
- the shelf basic information may include information indicating the coordinates (including the store floor) where the shelves are arranged.
- the business support device 300 may correct the position point D by using the shelf basic information.
- the business support device 300 is linked with at least one of the manufacturing execution system (Manufacturing Execution System; MES) and the transport management system (Transport Management System; TMS) when the product supply capacity is reviewed. , You may consider optimizing the supply capacity of the goods.
- MES Manufacturing Execution System
- TMS Transport Management System
- the business support device 300 calculates and calculates the product parameters of each product placed on the shelf based on at least one of the sales history information 5001 and the shortage history information 5002 of each product placed on the shelf.
- the shelf allocation layout 5003 may be generated by increasing or decreasing the number of each product arranged on the shelf based on the product parameters.
- the shelf layout layout 5003 may be generated not only in units of shelves but also in certain desired area units.
- the shelf layout 5003 may be generated for each product category area (for example, milk area, seasoning area, stationery area, confectionery area, chocolate confectionery area, vegetable area, etc.).
- the above “display shelf” may be read as other terms such as “shelf”, “gondola”, and “high gondola”. Further, the product is not limited to the case where it is arranged on the shelf, and may be arranged, for example, at the end of the shelf or on a shelf for flat placement.
- the above shelves are not limited to the shelves in the store's sales floor, and may be, for example, shelves in a warehouse or backyard.
- Goods may be placed on shelves and / or cards in warehouses or backyards.
- the goods may be stored and stacked in cardboard in a warehouse or backyard.
- the storage location of the products in the warehouse or the backyard may be determined for each product category.
- the warehouse or backyard has a layout (that is, FIFO (First-In First-Out)) so that products with the oldest warehousing date and time (for example, products with an earlier expiration date or expiration date, or products with an older manufacturing date) can be delivered in order. ) Layout).
- FIFO First-In First-Out
- the display shelf 10 is photographed by the camera device 100, and the shortage is detected by analyzing the captured image.
- the missing item may be detected by using a device different from the camera device 100.
- an infrared ToF (Time Of Flight) sensor is used to generate point cloud data on the shelf, and the shortage detection device 200 analyzes the point cloud data and is out of stock. May be detected.
- a weight sensor may be installed on the surface of the shelf on which the product is placed, and the shortage detection device 200 may detect the shortage based on the weight change obtained from the weight sensor.
- a temperature sensor may be installed on the surface of the shelf on which the product is placed, and the shortage detection device 200 may detect the shortage based on the temperature change obtained from the temperature sensor.
- the product layout planned by the head office that controls each store is called “Planogram”.
- the actual state of product placement in stores is called “Realogram”.
- the shelving layout 5003 described in Embodiment 5 may be generated as a planogram and recorded as a realogram.
- This disclosure can be used for a system that supports operations related to shortages.
Landscapes
- Business, Economics & Management (AREA)
- Accounting & Taxation (AREA)
- Finance (AREA)
- Strategic Management (AREA)
- Economics (AREA)
- Marketing (AREA)
- Development Economics (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- General Business, Economics & Management (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
- Management, Administration, Business Operations System, And Electronic Commerce (AREA)
- Display Racks (AREA)
Abstract
The present invention improves the efficiency of the work to be carried out when the shortage of an item on a shelf occurs. This work assistance device comprises: a reception unit that receives item shortage detection information identifying the shelf and the article for which an item shortage or partial item shortage has been detected, and inventory information indicating the inventory status of the article; and a processing unit that, on the basis of the inventory status which is indicated by the inventory information and which is the status of the article for which the item shortage or partial item shortage has been detected, controls the transmission timing of information prompting the replenishment of the shelf with the article for which the item shortage or partial item shortage has been detected, as indicated by the item shortage detection information.
Description
本開示は、業務支援装置、業務支援方法、及び、コンピュータプログラムに関する。
This disclosure relates to business support equipment, business support methods, and computer programs.
従来、店舗における商品が陳列されている棚(以下「陳列棚」と称する)をカメラ装置で撮影し、撮影画像を分析することによって陳列棚において商品が欠品しているか否かを判定する技術が知られている(特許文献1)。
Conventionally, a technique of photographing a shelf on which products are displayed in a store (hereinafter referred to as "display shelf") with a camera device and analyzing the photographed image to determine whether or not the product is out of stock on the display shelf. Is known (Patent Document 1).
しかし、特許文献1は、陳列棚における商品の欠品の検知に留まり、欠品が検知された場合における業務の効率化には言及していない。
However, Patent Document 1 is limited to detecting product shortages on display shelves, and does not refer to improving work efficiency when shortages are detected.
本開示は、陳列棚において欠品が生じた場合における業務を効率化する技術の提供を目的とする。
The purpose of this disclosure is to provide a technology for streamlining operations in the event of a shortage in a display shelf.
本開示の一態様に係る業務支援装置は、欠品または部分欠品が検知された棚及び物品を示す欠品検知情報、及び、前記物品の在庫状況を示す在庫情報を受信する受信部と、前記在庫情報に示される前記欠品または部分欠品が検知された前記物品の在庫状況に基づいて、前記欠品検知情報に示される欠品または部分欠品が検知された前記物品の前記棚への補充を促す情報の送信タイミングを制御する処理部と、を備える。
The business support device according to one aspect of the present disclosure includes a receiving unit that receives shortage detection information indicating a shelf and an article in which a missing item or a partial missing item is detected, and inventory information indicating the inventory status of the article. Based on the stock status of the article in which the shortage or partial shortage is detected shown in the inventory information, to the shelf of the article in which the shortage or partial shortage shown in the shortage detection information is detected. It is provided with a processing unit for controlling the transmission timing of information prompting the replenishment of the above.
本開示の一態様に係る業務支援方法は、情報処理装置によって、欠品または部分欠品が検知された棚及び物品を示す欠品検知情報、及び、前記物品の在庫状況を示す在庫情報を受信し、前記在庫情報に示される前記欠品または部分欠品が検知された前記物品の在庫状況に基づいて、前記欠品検知情報に示される欠品または部分欠品が検知された前記物品の前記棚への補充を促す情報の送信タイミングを制御する。
In the business support method according to one aspect of the present disclosure, the information processing apparatus receives shortage detection information indicating a shelf and an article in which a missing item or a partial missing item is detected, and inventory information indicating the inventory status of the article. Then, based on the stock status of the article in which the shortage or partial shortage is detected shown in the inventory information, the missing item or partial missing item shown in the shortage detection information is detected. Controls the timing of sending information that prompts the shelves to be replenished.
本開示の一態様に係るコンピュータプログラムは、欠品または部分欠品が検知された棚及び物品を示す欠品検知情報、及び、前記物品の在庫状況を示す在庫情報を受信し、前記在庫情報に示される前記欠品または部分欠品が検知された前記物品の在庫状況に基づいて、前記欠品検知情報に示される欠品または部分欠品が検知された前記物品の前記棚への補充を促す情報の送信タイミングを制御する、ことをコンピュータに実行させる。
The computer program according to one aspect of the present disclosure receives out-of-stock detection information indicating a shelf and an article in which a missing item or a partial missing item is detected, and inventory information indicating the inventory status of the article, and uses the inventory information as the inventory information. Based on the inventory status of the article in which the indicated shortage or partial shortage is detected, the shelf of the article in which the shortage or partial shortage indicated in the shortage detection information is detected is urged to be replenished. Let the computer do what it does to control when information is sent.
本開示の一態様に係る業務支援装置は、補充の必要性が検知された棚及び物品を示す補充検知情報、及び、前記物品の在庫状況を示す在庫情報を受信する受信部と、前記在庫情報に示される補充の必要性が検知された前記物品の在庫状況に基づいて、前記補充検知情報に示される補充の必要性が検知された前記物品の前記棚への補充を促す情報の送信タイミングを制御する処理部と、を備える。
The business support device according to one aspect of the present disclosure includes a receiving unit that receives replenishment detection information indicating a shelf and an article in which the need for replenishment is detected, inventory information indicating the inventory status of the article, and the inventory information. Based on the inventory status of the article in which the need for replenishment indicated in is detected, the timing of transmitting information prompting the replenishment of the article in which the need for replenishment indicated in the replenishment detection information is detected to the shelf is set. It is provided with a processing unit to be controlled.
本開示の一態様に係る業務支援方法は、情報処理装置によって、補充の必要性が検知された棚及び物品を示す補充検知情報、及び、前記物品の在庫状況を示す在庫情報を受信し、前記在庫情報に示される補充の必要性が検知された前記物品の在庫状況に基づいて、前記補充検知情報に示される補充の必要性が検知された前記物品の前記棚への補充を促す情報の送信タイミングを制御する。
The business support method according to one aspect of the present disclosure receives replenishment detection information indicating a shelf and an article for which the need for replenishment has been detected, and inventory information indicating the inventory status of the article by an information processing apparatus, and the above-mentioned Based on the stock status of the article in which the need for replenishment indicated in the inventory information is detected, the transmission of information prompting the replenishment of the article in which the need for replenishment indicated in the replenishment detection information is detected is performed. Control the timing.
本開示の一態様に係るコンピュータプログラムは、補充の必要性が検知された棚及び物品を示す補充検知情報、及び、前記物品の在庫状況を示す在庫情報を受信し、前記在庫情報に示される補充の必要性が検知された前記物品の在庫状況に基づいて、前記補充検知情報に示される欠品または半欠品が検知された前記物品の前記棚への補充を促す情報の送信タイミングを制御する、ことをコンピュータに実行させる。
The computer program according to one aspect of the present disclosure receives replenishment detection information indicating the shelves and articles for which the need for replenishment is detected, and inventory information indicating the inventory status of the articles, and the replenishment indicated in the inventory information. Based on the inventory status of the article in which the necessity of the above is detected, the timing of transmitting information prompting the replenishment of the article in which the shortage or semi-deficiency indicated in the replenishment detection information is detected is controlled. Let the computer do that.
なお、これらの包括的又は具体的な態様は、システム、装置、方法、集積回路、コンピュータプログラム、又は、記録媒体で実現されてもよく、システム、装置、方法、集積回路、コンピュータプログラム及び記録媒体の任意な組み合わせで実現されてもよい。
It should be noted that these comprehensive or specific embodiments may be realized by a system, an apparatus, a method, an integrated circuit, a computer program, or a recording medium, and the system, an apparatus, a method, an integrated circuit, a computer program, and a recording medium may be realized. It may be realized by any combination of.
本開示によれば、陳列棚において欠品が生じた場合における業務を効率化できる。
According to this disclosure, it is possible to streamline operations when a shortage occurs on a display shelf.
なお、本開示の一態様におけるさらなる利点及び効果は、明細書及び図面から明らかにされる。かかる利点及び/又は効果は、いくつかの実施形態並びに明細書及び図面に記載された特徴によってそれぞれ提供されるが、1つ又はそれ以上の同一の特徴を得るために必ずしもすべてが提供される必要はない。
Further advantages and effects in one aspect of the present disclosure will be clarified from the specification and drawings. Such advantages and / or effects are provided by some embodiments and the features described in the specification and drawings, respectively, but not all need to be provided in order to obtain one or more identical features. There is no.
以下、図面を適宜参照して、本開示の実施の形態について、詳細に説明する。ただし、必要以上に詳細な説明は省略する場合がある。例えば、すでによく知られた事項の詳細説明及び実質的に同一の構成に対する重複説明を省略する場合がある。これは、以下の説明が不必要に冗長になるのを避け、当業者の理解を容易にするためである。なお、添付図面及び以下の説明は、当業者が本開示を十分に理解するために提供されるのであって、これらにより特許請求の記載の主題を限定することは意図されていない。
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present disclosure will be described in detail with reference to the drawings as appropriate. However, more detailed explanation than necessary may be omitted. For example, detailed explanations of already well-known matters and duplicate explanations for substantially the same configuration may be omitted. This is to avoid unnecessary redundancy of the following description and to facilitate the understanding of those skilled in the art. It should be noted that the accompanying drawings and the following description are provided for those skilled in the art to fully understand the present disclosure, and are not intended to limit the subject matter of the claims.
(実施の形態1)
<システム構成>
図1は、実施の形態1に係る業務支援システムの構成例を示す図である。 (Embodiment 1)
<System configuration>
FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a business support system according to the first embodiment.
<システム構成>
図1は、実施の形態1に係る業務支援システムの構成例を示す図である。 (Embodiment 1)
<System configuration>
FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a business support system according to the first embodiment.
業務支援システムは、店舗に配置される陳列棚10における商品の欠品を検知し、欠品が検知された場合における業務を支援するシステムである。店舗は、例えば、スーパーマーケット、コンビニエンスストア、百貨店、量販店、ディスカウントストア、書店、又は、各種施設の売店である。陳列棚10には、物品の一例として、店舗にて販売される商品が陳列される。陳列棚10は、店舗内に限らず、店舗外に配置されてもよい。
The business support system is a system that detects product shortages on the display shelves 10 arranged in stores and supports business when the shortages are detected. The store is, for example, a supermarket, a convenience store, a department store, a mass retailer, a discount store, a bookstore, or a store of various facilities. As an example of goods, goods sold in stores are displayed on the display shelves 10. The display shelf 10 is not limited to the inside of the store, but may be arranged outside the store.
また、陳列棚10には、陳列される商品の商品名及び価格等を表示するための棚札20が付されてもよい。棚札20は、液晶ディスプレイ又は電子ペーパーを備え、無線通信によって表示内容を書き換え可能な電子棚札である。ただし、本実施の形態は、電子棚札に限られず、表示内容を紙に印刷又は手書きした棚札であってもよい。なお、棚札20は、棚タグ、棚カード又は棚ラベルといった他の用語に読み替えられてもよい。
Further, the display shelf 10 may be attached with a shelf tag 20 for displaying the product name, price, and the like of the products to be displayed. The shelf label 20 is an electronic shelf label provided with a liquid crystal display or electronic paper, and the display contents can be rewritten by wireless communication. However, the present embodiment is not limited to the electronic shelf label, and may be a shelf label in which the display content is printed or handwritten on paper. The shelf tag 20 may be read as another term such as a shelf tag, a shelf card, or a shelf label.
業務支援システムは、カメラ装置100、欠品検知装置200及び業務支援装置300を備える。業務支援システムは、さらに端末400を備えてもよい。端末400は、例えば、欠品に対する業務を行う者(以下「担当者」と称する)に所持される。担当者2は、例えば、陳列棚10が配置される店舗の店員又は店長である。
The business support system includes a camera device 100, a shortage detection device 200, and a business support device 300. The business support system may further include a terminal 400. The terminal 400 is possessed by, for example, a person (hereinafter referred to as a “person in charge”) who performs business for a shortage. The person in charge 2 is, for example, a clerk or a store manager of a store in which the display shelf 10 is arranged.
カメラ装置100は、商品が陳列されている陳列棚10の面を撮影可能な位置に設置される。カメラ装置100は、陳列棚10を撮影した画像(以下「撮影画像」と称する)を、通信ネットワークを介して、欠品検知装置200へ送信する。当該通信ネットワークは、例えば、有線LAN(Local Area Network)又は無線LANによって構成される。
The camera device 100 is installed at a position where the surface of the display shelf 10 on which the products are displayed can be photographed. The camera device 100 transmits an image of the display shelf 10 (hereinafter referred to as a “photographed image”) to the shortage detection device 200 via a communication network. The communication network is configured by, for example, a wired LAN (Local Area Network) or a wireless LAN.
複数のカメラ装置100が1店舗に設置されてもよい。また、1台のカメラ装置100によって1つの陳列棚10が撮影されてもよい。あるいは、1台のカメラ装置100によって複数の陳列棚10が撮影されてもよい。あるいは、複数のカメラ装置100によって1つの陳列棚10が撮影されてもよい。カメラ装置100は、PTZ(パンチルトズーム)カメラであってもよい。カメラ装置100は、店舗内の監視のために設置されたもの(つまり監視カメラ)であってもよい。あるいは、カメラ装置100は、陳列棚10における欠品を検知するために設置されたものであってもよい。
A plurality of camera devices 100 may be installed in one store. Further, one display shelf 10 may be photographed by one camera device 100. Alternatively, a plurality of display shelves 10 may be photographed by one camera device 100. Alternatively, one display shelf 10 may be photographed by a plurality of camera devices 100. The camera device 100 may be a PTZ (pan / tilt zoom) camera. The camera device 100 may be installed for monitoring in the store (that is, a surveillance camera). Alternatively, the camera device 100 may be installed to detect a shortage in the display shelf 10.
欠品検知装置200は、カメラ装置100から受信した撮影画像を分析して、欠品が生じている陳列棚10(以下「欠品棚」と称する)を検知する。欠品検知装置200は、欠品棚を検知した場合、少なくとも欠品棚の識別情報を含む欠品検知情報を、通信ネットワーク3を介して、業務支援装置300へ送信する。当該通信ネットワーク3は、例えば、インターネットによって構成される。欠品検知装置200は、図1に示すように、店舗内に設置される。あるいは、欠品検知装置200は、通信ネットワーク3を介して所定のサービスを提供するサーバ(例えばクラウドサーバ)として設置されてもよい。この場合、カメラ装置100は、通信ネットワーク3を介して、撮影画像を欠品検知装置200へ送信してもよい。欠品は、陳列棚10から特定の商品が完全になくなってしまった状態に限らず、部分欠品している状態も含む。部分欠品している状態は、陳列棚10における商品の補充が100%未満である状態であってよく、例えば、陳列棚10における商品の補充が50%以下又は30%以下の状態であってよい。また、部分欠品は、陳列棚10において商品が20%~80%補充されている状態、または、一定の個数(例えば最大10個陳列できる棚において3個~5個)がなくなった状態であってもよい。すなわち、部分欠品は、陳列棚10が少なくとも満杯ではない状態であってよい。
The shortage detection device 200 analyzes the captured image received from the camera device 100 and detects the display shelf 10 (hereinafter referred to as “out of stock shelf”) in which the shortage occurs. When the shortage detection device 200 detects a shortage shelf, the shortage detection device 200 transmits the shortage detection information including at least the identification information of the shortage shelf to the business support device 300 via the communication network 3. The communication network 3 is configured by, for example, the Internet. As shown in FIG. 1, the shortage detection device 200 is installed in the store. Alternatively, the shortage detection device 200 may be installed as a server (for example, a cloud server) that provides a predetermined service via the communication network 3. In this case, the camera device 100 may transmit the captured image to the shortage detection device 200 via the communication network 3. The shortage is not limited to the state in which the specific product is completely disappeared from the display shelf 10, but also includes the state in which the specific product is partially out of stock. The partially out of stock state may be a state in which the replenishment of goods in the display shelf 10 is less than 100%, for example, a state in which the replenishment of goods in the display shelf 10 is 50% or less or 30% or less. good. In addition, the partial shortage is a state in which 20% to 80% of the products are replenished in the display shelf 10, or a state in which a certain number (for example, 3 to 5 in a shelf capable of displaying up to 10 pieces) has disappeared. You may. That is, the partial shortage may be in a state where the display shelf 10 is at least not full.
業務支援装置300は、欠品検知装置200から欠品検知情報を受信し、欠品検知情報に基づいて、担当者2の欠品した商品に関する業務を支援するための情報(以下「業務支援情報」と称する)を生成する。業務支援装置300は、生成した業務支援情報を、当該担当者2の端末400へ送信する。業務支援情報は、例えば、端末400が業務支援用のUI(User Interface)を表示するための情報である。また、業務支援装置300は、端末400から指示情報を受信し、当該指示情報に対応する処理を行う。指示情報は、担当者2が端末400に入力した指示を示す情報である。業務支援装置300は、通信ネットワーク3を介して所定のサービスを提供するサーバ(例えばクラウドサーバ)として設置される。
The business support device 300 receives the shortage detection information from the shortage detection device 200, and based on the shortage detection information, information for supporting the business related to the shortage product of the person in charge 2 (hereinafter, “business support information”). ") Is generated. The business support device 300 transmits the generated business support information to the terminal 400 of the person in charge 2. The business support information is, for example, information for the terminal 400 to display a UI (User Interface) for business support. Further, the business support device 300 receives instruction information from the terminal 400 and performs processing corresponding to the instruction information. The instruction information is information indicating an instruction input to the terminal 400 by the person in charge 2. The business support device 300 is installed as a server (for example, a cloud server) that provides a predetermined service via the communication network 3.
また、業務支援装置300は、陳列棚10に付されている棚札20の表示内容を更新するための情報(以下「棚札更新情報」と称する)を、店舗の棚札20へ送信してよい。棚札更新情報を受信した棚札20は、当該棚札更新情報に基づいて、表示内容を更新する。棚札20における表示内容の例は、商品名、価格及び/又はPOP情報である。POP情報は、例えば、キャッチコピー、説明文、割引価格又は割引率である。
Further, the business support device 300 transmits information for updating the display contents of the shelf label 20 attached to the display shelf 10 (hereinafter referred to as “shelf tag update information”) to the shelf label 20 of the store. good. The shelf label 20 that has received the shelf label update information updates the display content based on the shelf label update information. An example of the display content on the shelf tag 20 is a product name, a price, and / or POP information. The POP information is, for example, a catch phrase, a description, a discount price or a discount rate.
端末400は、業務支援装置300から業務支援情報を受信し、業務支援情報に基づいて、業務支援用のUIを表示する。また、端末400は、担当者2によって入力された指示情報を、業務支援装置300へ送信する。端末400は、例えば、タブレット、スマートフォン又はPCである。端末400に表示されるUIは、端末400で動作するアプリケーションが業務支援情報に基づいて生成するUIであってもよい。あるいは、端末400に表示されるUIは、端末400で動作するWEBブラウザが業務支援情報に基づいて生成するUIであってもよい。
The terminal 400 receives the business support information from the business support device 300, and displays the UI for business support based on the business support information. Further, the terminal 400 transmits the instruction information input by the person in charge 2 to the business support device 300. The terminal 400 is, for example, a tablet, a smartphone or a PC. The UI displayed on the terminal 400 may be a UI generated by the application running on the terminal 400 based on the business support information. Alternatively, the UI displayed on the terminal 400 may be a UI generated by the WEB browser operating on the terminal 400 based on the business support information.
<欠品検知装置の構成>
図2は、欠品検知装置200の構成例を示す図である。欠品検知装置200は、処理部201、メモリ202、通信部203、及び、ストレージ204を備える。これらの要素201から204は、双方向通信可能な内部バス205によって接続される。すなわち、欠品検知装置200は、プロセッサ及びメモリを有するコンピュータ装置により構成されてよい。 <Configuration of shortage detection device>
FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a configuration example of theshortage detection device 200. The shortage detection device 200 includes a processing unit 201, a memory 202, a communication unit 203, and a storage 204. These elements 201 to 204 are connected by an internal bus 205 capable of bidirectional communication. That is, the shortage detection device 200 may be configured by a computer device having a processor and a memory.
図2は、欠品検知装置200の構成例を示す図である。欠品検知装置200は、処理部201、メモリ202、通信部203、及び、ストレージ204を備える。これらの要素201から204は、双方向通信可能な内部バス205によって接続される。すなわち、欠品検知装置200は、プロセッサ及びメモリを有するコンピュータ装置により構成されてよい。 <Configuration of shortage detection device>
FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the
処理部201は、コンピュータプログラムを実行し、欠品検知装置200が有する機能を実現する。処理部201は、プロセッサ、コントローラ、CPU(Central Processing Unit)、又は集積回路といった他の用語に読み替えられてもよい。また、以下の説明において、欠品検知装置200が主体の処理は、処理部201が主体の処理に読み替えられてもよい。
The processing unit 201 executes a computer program and realizes the functions of the shortage detection device 200. The processing unit 201 may be read as another term such as a processor, a controller, a CPU (Central Processing Unit), or an integrated circuit. Further, in the following description, the processing mainly performed by the shortage detection device 200 may be read as the processing mainly performed by the processing unit 201.
メモリ202は、欠品検知装置200が有する機能に関するコンピュータプログラム及びデータを記憶する。メモリ202は、例えば、ROM(Read Only Memory)、RAM(Random Access Memory)又はこれらの組み合わせによって構成されてもよい。
The memory 202 stores computer programs and data related to the functions of the shortage detection device 200. The memory 202 may be configured by, for example, a ROM (ReadOnlyMemory), a RAM (RandomAccessMemory), or a combination thereof.
ストレージ204は、欠品検知装置200が有する機能に関するコンピュータプログラム及びデータを格納する。ストレージ204は、例えば、HDD(Hard Disk Drive)、SSD(Solid State Drive)又はフラッシュメモリによって構成されてもよい。また、ストレージ204には、棚割情報210が格納されてもよい。なお、棚割情報210とは、陳列棚10及び区画30を識別するために用いられる情報である。
The storage 204 stores computer programs and data related to the functions of the shortage detection device 200. The storage 204 may be configured by, for example, an HDD (Hard Disk Drive), an SSD (Solid State Drive), or a flash memory. Further, the storage 204 may store the shelf allocation information 210. The shelf allocation information 210 is information used to identify the display shelf 10 and the section 30.
通信部203は、通信ネットワークを介した他の装置とのデータの送受信を制御する。通信部203は、データの送信を制御する送信部203A、及び、データの受信を制御する受信部203Bを含んでよい。通信部203は、通信インタフェース又は通信モジュールといった他の用語に読み替えられてもよい。
The communication unit 203 controls the transmission and reception of data with other devices via the communication network. The communication unit 203 may include a transmission unit 203A that controls the transmission of data and a reception unit 203B that controls the reception of data. The communication unit 203 may be read as another term such as a communication interface or a communication module.
図3は、陳列棚10の商品が陳列されている面の例を示す図である。次に、図3を参照して、欠品検知装置200が、欠品の生じた陳列棚10を検知する方法の一例について説明する。
FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a surface on which the products of the display shelf 10 are displayed. Next, with reference to FIG. 3, an example of a method in which the shortage detection device 200 detects the display shelf 10 in which the shortage has occurred will be described.
図3に示すように、陳列棚10は、棚板11によって複数の陳列スペース12に区切られる。棚板11には、棚札20が付される。棚札20の上方のスペースには、当該棚札20に対応する同一の商品が陳列される。本実施の形態において、棚札20に対応する同一の商品が陳列されるスペースを、区画30と称する。欠品検知装置200は、陳列棚10の撮影画像に対して、区画30を設定する。なお、図3では、区画30各々の間には隙間が設けられているが、これは無くてもよい。区画30の形状は、矩形に限られず、多角形、楕円形又は円形であってもよい。区画30は、陳列棚10の撮影画像に対して手動で設定されてもよい。あるいは、区画30は、欠品検知装置200によって自動的に設定されてもよい。欠品検知装置200が区画30を自動的に設定する例については後述する。
As shown in FIG. 3, the display shelf 10 is divided into a plurality of display spaces 12 by the shelf board 11. A shelf tag 20 is attached to the shelf board 11. In the space above the shelf tag 20, the same product corresponding to the shelf tag 20 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the space where the same product corresponding to the shelf tag 20 is displayed is referred to as a section 30. The shortage detection device 200 sets a section 30 for a photographed image of the display shelf 10. In FIG. 3, a gap is provided between each of the compartments 30, but this may not be provided. The shape of the compartment 30 is not limited to a rectangle, and may be a polygon, an ellipse, or a circle. The section 30 may be manually set for the captured image of the display shelf 10. Alternatively, the section 30 may be automatically set by the shortage detection device 200. An example in which the shortage detection device 200 automatically sets the section 30 will be described later.
図3において、点線で示した区画30は、欠品が生じている区画30を示す。欠品検知装置200は、図3に示すような陳列棚10の撮影画像における各区画30の画像を分析し、陳列棚10において欠品が生じているか否かを判定する。
In FIG. 3, the section 30 shown by the dotted line indicates the section 30 where the shortage has occurred. The shortage detection device 200 analyzes the images of each section 30 in the captured image of the display shelf 10 as shown in FIG. 3, and determines whether or not the display shelf 10 is out of stock.
例えば、欠品検知装置200は、商品が陳列されていない場合(つまり欠品の場合)の区画30の画像(以下「欠品画像」と称する)を予め記憶しておき、陳列棚10の撮影画像において欠品画像が検知された場合、当該陳列棚10において欠品が生じていると判定する。欠品画像は、例えば、陳列棚10の背景の画像である。
For example, the shortage detection device 200 stores in advance an image (hereinafter referred to as “out of stock image”) of the section 30 when the product is not displayed (that is, when the product is out of stock), and takes a picture of the display shelf 10. When a missing item image is detected in the image, it is determined that the display shelf 10 is out of stock. The out-of-stock image is, for example, an image of the background of the display shelf 10.
欠品検知装置200は、欠品が生じている陳列棚10(つまり欠品棚)に加えて、欠品が生じている区画30(以下「欠品区画」と称する)を特定してもよい。この場合、欠品検知装置200は、欠品棚の識別情報(以下「欠品棚識別情報」と称する)と、欠品区画の識別情報(以下「欠品区画識別情報」と称する)とを、欠品検知情報に含めてもよい。
The out-of-stock detection device 200 may specify the out-of-stock section 30 (hereinafter referred to as "out-of-stock section") in addition to the out-of-stock display shelf 10 (that is, the out-of-stock shelf). .. In this case, the shortage detection device 200 uses the shortage shelf identification information (hereinafter referred to as "out of stock shelf identification information") and the shortage section identification information (hereinafter referred to as "out of stock section identification information"). , May be included in the shortage detection information.
さらに、欠品検知装置200は、欠品区画に陳列されていた商品(以下「欠品商品」と称する)を特定し、特定した欠品商品の識別情報(以下「欠品商品識別情報」と称する)を、欠品検知情報に含めてもよい。欠品検知装置200は、後述する棚割情報210を用いることにより、欠品区画における欠品商品を特定してもよい。
Further, the shortage detection device 200 identifies the products displayed in the shortage section (hereinafter referred to as “missing products”), and identifies the identified shortage products (hereinafter referred to as “out of stock product identification information”). ) May be included in the shortage detection information. The shortage detection device 200 may identify the shortage product in the shortage section by using the shelf allocation information 210 described later.
図4は、棚割情報210の例を示す図である。
FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of shelf allocation information 210.
図4に示すように、棚割情報210は、項目として、エリアID、棚ID、棚段、位置番号、陳列可能数及び商品情報を有する。
・エリアIDは、店舗におけるエリアを識別するための情報である。
・棚IDは、エリアIDが示すエリアにおける、陳列棚10を識別するための情報である。
・棚段は、棚IDが示す陳列棚10における、下から数えた段数を示す情報(つまり陳列スペース12を示す情報)である。なお、棚段は、上から数えた段数を示す情報であってもよい。
・位置番号は、棚段が示す陳列スペース12において、左から数えた区画30の番号を示す情報である。なお、位置番号は、棚段が示す陳列スペース12において、右から数えた区画30の番号を示す情報であってもよい。
・陳列可能数は、棚段及び位置番号が示す区画30に陳列可能な商品の数を示す情報である。
・商品情報は、棚段及び位置番号が示す区画30に陳列される商品の情報である。商品情報には、例えば、商品に対応する、商品コード、商品名及び価格のうちの少なくとも1つが含まれる。 As shown in FIG. 4, theshelf allocation information 210 has an area ID, a shelf ID, a shelf, a position number, a displayable number, and product information as items.
-The area ID is information for identifying the area in the store.
The shelf ID is information for identifying thedisplay shelf 10 in the area indicated by the area ID.
The shelf is information indicating the number of shelves counted from the bottom (that is, information indicating the display space 12) in thedisplay shelf 10 indicated by the shelf ID. The shelf may be information indicating the number of shelves counted from the top.
The position number is information indicating the number of thesection 30 counted from the left in the display space 12 indicated by the shelf. The position number may be information indicating the number of the section 30 counted from the right in the display space 12 indicated by the shelf.
-The number that can be displayed is information indicating the number of products that can be displayed in thesection 30 indicated by the shelf and the position number.
-Product information is information on products displayed in the shelves and thesection 30 indicated by the position number. The product information includes, for example, at least one of a product code, a product name, and a price corresponding to the product.
・エリアIDは、店舗におけるエリアを識別するための情報である。
・棚IDは、エリアIDが示すエリアにおける、陳列棚10を識別するための情報である。
・棚段は、棚IDが示す陳列棚10における、下から数えた段数を示す情報(つまり陳列スペース12を示す情報)である。なお、棚段は、上から数えた段数を示す情報であってもよい。
・位置番号は、棚段が示す陳列スペース12において、左から数えた区画30の番号を示す情報である。なお、位置番号は、棚段が示す陳列スペース12において、右から数えた区画30の番号を示す情報であってもよい。
・陳列可能数は、棚段及び位置番号が示す区画30に陳列可能な商品の数を示す情報である。
・商品情報は、棚段及び位置番号が示す区画30に陳列される商品の情報である。商品情報には、例えば、商品に対応する、商品コード、商品名及び価格のうちの少なくとも1つが含まれる。 As shown in FIG. 4, the
-The area ID is information for identifying the area in the store.
The shelf ID is information for identifying the
The shelf is information indicating the number of shelves counted from the bottom (that is, information indicating the display space 12) in the
The position number is information indicating the number of the
-The number that can be displayed is information indicating the number of products that can be displayed in the
-Product information is information on products displayed in the shelves and the
棚割情報210における棚段及び位置番号は、棚IDが示す陳列棚10における区画30を識別するための情報(以下「区画識別情報」と称する)の一例である。棚段及び位置番号以外の情報としては、陳列棚10における座標値が考えられる。これは、例えば、陳列棚10の左上を起点として、この起点から右何mm、下何mmといった位置そのものを特定する値である。
The shelf stage and the position number in the shelf allocation information 210 are examples of information for identifying the section 30 in the display shelf 10 indicated by the shelf ID (hereinafter referred to as “section identification information”). As the information other than the shelves and the position numbers, the coordinate values on the display shelf 10 can be considered. This is, for example, a value that specifies the position itself, such as how many mm to the right and how many mm below from this starting point, starting from the upper left of the display shelf 10.
欠品検知装置200は、棚割情報210を参照して、欠品が生じた陳列棚10(つまり欠品棚)の棚IDを特定し、特定した棚IDを、欠品棚識別情報に含めてよい。また、欠品検知装置200は、棚割情報210を参照して、欠品が生じた区画30の区画識別情報及び陳列可能数を特定し、特定した区画識別情報及び陳列可能数を、欠品区画識別情報に含めてよい。また、欠品検知装置200は、棚割情報210を参照して、欠品が生じた商品の商品情報を特定し、特定した商品情報を、欠品商品識別情報に含めてよい。
The shortage detection device 200 identifies the shelf ID of the display shelf 10 (that is, the shortage shelf) in which the shortage has occurred with reference to the shelf allocation information 210, and includes the specified shelf ID in the shortage shelf identification information. You can do it. Further, the out-of-stock detection device 200 specifies the section identification information and the number of items that can be displayed in the section 30 in which the out-of-stock has occurred, with reference to the shelf allocation information 210, and the specified section identification information and the number of items that can be displayed are out of stock. It may be included in the partition identification information. Further, the shortage detection device 200 may specify the product information of the product in which the shortage has occurred with reference to the shelf allocation information 210, and include the specified product information in the shortage product identification information.
<端末の構成>
図5は、端末400の構成例を示す図である。端末400は、処理部401、メモリ402、通信部403、入力部404、表示部405、及び、ストレージ406を備える。
これらの要素401から406は、双方向通信可能な内部バス407によって接続される。すなわち、端末400は、プロセッサ及びメモリを有するコンピュータ装置によって構成されてよい。 <Terminal configuration>
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the terminal 400. The terminal 400 includes aprocessing unit 401, a memory 402, a communication unit 403, an input unit 404, a display unit 405, and a storage unit 406.
Theseelements 401 to 406 are connected by an internal bus 407 capable of bidirectional communication. That is, the terminal 400 may be configured by a computer device having a processor and a memory.
図5は、端末400の構成例を示す図である。端末400は、処理部401、メモリ402、通信部403、入力部404、表示部405、及び、ストレージ406を備える。
これらの要素401から406は、双方向通信可能な内部バス407によって接続される。すなわち、端末400は、プロセッサ及びメモリを有するコンピュータ装置によって構成されてよい。 <Terminal configuration>
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the terminal 400. The terminal 400 includes a
These
処理部401は、コンピュータプログラムを実行し、端末400が有する機能を実現する。処理部401は、プロセッサ、コントローラ、CPU、又は集積回路といった他の用語に読み替えられてもよい。また、以下の説明において、端末400が主体の処理は、処理部401が主体の処理に読み替えられてもよい。
The processing unit 401 executes a computer program and realizes the functions of the terminal 400. The processing unit 401 may be read as another term such as a processor, a controller, a CPU, or an integrated circuit. Further, in the following description, the processing mainly performed by the terminal 400 may be read as the processing mainly performed by the processing unit 401.
メモリ402は、端末400が有する機能に関するコンピュータプログラム及びデータを記憶する。メモリ402は、例えば、ROM、RAM又はこれらの組み合わせによって構成されてもよい。
The memory 402 stores computer programs and data related to the functions of the terminal 400. The memory 402 may be composed of, for example, a ROM, a RAM, or a combination thereof.
ストレージ406は、端末400が有する機能に関するコンピュータプログラム及びデータを格納する。ストレージ406は、例えば、HDD、SSD又はフラッシュメモリによって構成されてもよい。
The storage 406 stores computer programs and data related to the functions of the terminal 400. The storage 406 may be configured by, for example, an HDD, SSD or flash memory.
通信部403は、通信ネットワークを介した他の装置とのデータの送受信を制御する。通信部403は、データの送信を制御する送信部403A、及び、データの受信を制御する受信部403Bを含んでよい。通信部403は、通信インタフェース又は通信モジュールといった他の用語に読み替えられてもよい。
The communication unit 403 controls the transmission and reception of data with other devices via the communication network. The communication unit 403 may include a transmission unit 403A that controls the transmission of data and a reception unit 403B that controls the reception of data. The communication unit 403 may be read as another term such as a communication interface or a communication module.
入力部404は、端末400に対する操作の入力を受け付ける。入力部404は、例えば、ボタン、スイッチ、タッチパネル及び/又はマイクといった入力インタフェースによって構成される。
The input unit 404 receives an operation input to the terminal 400. The input unit 404 is composed of an input interface such as a button, a switch, a touch panel and / or a microphone.
表示部405は、UIの文字及び画像等を表示する。表示部405は、ディスプレイ又はモニタといった他の用語に読み替えられてもよい。
The display unit 405 displays UI characters, images, and the like. The display unit 405 may be read as another term such as a display or a monitor.
<業務支援装置の構成>
図6は、業務支援装置300の構成例を示す図である。業務支援装置300は、処理部301、メモリ302、通信部303、及びストレージ304を備える。これらの要素301から304は、双方向通信可能な内部バス305によって接続される。すなわち、業務支援装置300は、プロセッサ及びメモリを有するコンピュータ装置によって構成されてよい。 <Configuration of business support equipment>
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a configuration example of thebusiness support device 300. The business support device 300 includes a processing unit 301, a memory 302, a communication unit 303, and a storage 304. These elements 301 to 304 are connected by an internal bus 305 capable of bidirectional communication. That is, the business support device 300 may be configured by a computer device having a processor and a memory.
図6は、業務支援装置300の構成例を示す図である。業務支援装置300は、処理部301、メモリ302、通信部303、及びストレージ304を備える。これらの要素301から304は、双方向通信可能な内部バス305によって接続される。すなわち、業務支援装置300は、プロセッサ及びメモリを有するコンピュータ装置によって構成されてよい。 <Configuration of business support equipment>
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the
処理部301は、コンピュータプログラムを実行し、業務支援装置300が有する機能を実現する。処理部301は、プロセッサ、コントローラ、CPU、又は集積回路といった他の用語に読み替えられてもよい。なお、以下の説明において、業務支援装置300が主体の処理は、処理部301が主体の処理に読み替えられてもよい。
The processing unit 301 executes a computer program and realizes the functions of the business support device 300. The processing unit 301 may be read as another term such as a processor, a controller, a CPU, or an integrated circuit. In the following description, the processing mainly performed by the business support device 300 may be read as the processing mainly performed by the processing unit 301.
メモリ302は、業務支援装置300が有する機能に関するコンピュータプログラム及びデータを記憶する。メモリ302は、例えば、ROM、RAM又はこれらの組み合わせによって構成されてもよい。
The memory 302 stores computer programs and data related to the functions of the business support device 300. The memory 302 may be composed of, for example, a ROM, a RAM, or a combination thereof.
ストレージ304は、業務支援装置300が有する機能に関するコンピュータプログラム及びデータを格納する。ストレージ304は、例えば、HDD、SSD又はフラッシュメモリによって構成されてもよい。
The storage 304 stores computer programs and data related to the functions of the business support device 300. The storage 304 may be composed of, for example, an HDD, an SSD, or a flash memory.
通信部303は、通信ネットワークを介した他の装置とのデータの送受信を制御する。
通信部303は、データの送信を制御する送信部303A、及び、データの受信を制御する受信部303Bを含んでよい。通信部303は、通信インタフェース又は通信モジュールといった他の用語に読み替えられてもよい。 Thecommunication unit 303 controls transmission / reception of data with other devices via the communication network.
Thecommunication unit 303 may include a transmission unit 303A that controls the transmission of data and a reception unit 303B that controls the reception of data. The communication unit 303 may be read as another term such as a communication interface or a communication module.
通信部303は、データの送信を制御する送信部303A、及び、データの受信を制御する受信部303Bを含んでよい。通信部303は、通信インタフェース又は通信モジュールといった他の用語に読み替えられてもよい。 The
The
図7は、管理情報の一例を示す図である。業務支援装置300は、業務支援情報の生成に用いられる管理情報310を、ストレージ304に格納する。管理情報310には、次の情報のうちの少なくとも1つが含まれる。
・商品に関する情報である商品情報
・陳列棚の棚割に関する情報である棚割情報
・商品の在庫に関する情報である在庫情報
・陳列棚の配置に関する情報である棚地図情報
・商品の価格に関する情報である価格情報
・商品の需要予測に関する需要予測情報
・欠品に関する履歴情報である欠品履歴情報
・注文に関する履歴情報である注文履歴情報
・欠品への対処に関する履歴情報である欠品対処履歴情報
・棚割のアドバイスへの対処に関する履歴情報である棚割アドバイス対処履歴情報 FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of management information. Thebusiness support device 300 stores the management information 310 used for generating the business support information in the storage 304. The management information 310 includes at least one of the following information.
・ Product information that is information about products ・ Shelf allocation information that is information about shelf allocation of display shelves ・ Inventory information that is information about inventory of products ・ Shelf map information that is information about arrangement of display shelves ・ Information about price of products Certain price information ・ Demand forecast information related to demand forecast of products ・ Out of stock history information which is history information about shortages ・ Order history information which is history information about orders ・ Out of stock handling history information which is history information about dealing with shortages・ Shelf allocation advice handling history information, which is historical information on dealing with shelf allocation advice
・商品に関する情報である商品情報
・陳列棚の棚割に関する情報である棚割情報
・商品の在庫に関する情報である在庫情報
・陳列棚の配置に関する情報である棚地図情報
・商品の価格に関する情報である価格情報
・商品の需要予測に関する需要予測情報
・欠品に関する履歴情報である欠品履歴情報
・注文に関する履歴情報である注文履歴情報
・欠品への対処に関する履歴情報である欠品対処履歴情報
・棚割のアドバイスへの対処に関する履歴情報である棚割アドバイス対処履歴情報 FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of management information. The
・ Product information that is information about products ・ Shelf allocation information that is information about shelf allocation of display shelves ・ Inventory information that is information about inventory of products ・ Shelf map information that is information about arrangement of display shelves ・ Information about price of products Certain price information ・ Demand forecast information related to demand forecast of products ・ Out of stock history information which is history information about shortages ・ Order history information which is history information about orders ・ Out of stock handling history information which is history information about dealing with shortages・ Shelf allocation advice handling history information, which is historical information on dealing with shelf allocation advice
業務支援装置300にて保持される棚割情報は、図4に示した欠品検知装置200にて保持される棚割情報210と同様の情報であってよい。あるいは、業務支援装置300にて保持される棚割情報は、図4に示した欠品検知装置200にて保持される棚割情報210と、少なくとも一部が異なる情報であってもよい。また、業務支援装置300は、店舗ごとの棚割情報を保持してもよい。
The shelf allocation information held by the business support device 300 may be the same information as the shelf allocation information 210 held by the shortage detection device 200 shown in FIG. Alternatively, the shelf allocation information held by the business support device 300 may be information that is at least partially different from the shelf allocation information 210 held by the shortage detection device 200 shown in FIG. Further, the business support device 300 may hold the shelf allocation information for each store.
次に、業務支援装置300が各店舗の端末400に対して提供する業務支援サービスについて説明する。
Next, the business support service provided by the business support device 300 to the terminal 400 of each store will be described.
図8は、業務支援サービスに対するログインUIの例を示す図である。図9は、業務支援サービスにおけるサービスメニューUIの例を示す図である。
FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an example of a login UI for a business support service. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of a service menu UI in a business support service.
業務支援装置300は、端末400からアクセスを受けた場合、まず、図8に示すログインUI900を端末400に提供する。担当者2は、ログインUI900に対して、当該担当者2に予め付与されたユーザID及びパスワードを入力して、ログインボタン901を押下する。業務支援装置300は、入力されたユーザID及びパスワードの認証に成功した場合、図9に示すサービスメニューUI910を端末400に提供する。なお、UIの説明におけるボタンの「押下」は、ボタンの「タッチ」、「タップ」、「クリック」又は「選択」といった他の用語に読み替えられる。
When the business support device 300 receives access from the terminal 400, the business support device 300 first provides the login UI 900 shown in FIG. 8 to the terminal 400. The person in charge 2 inputs the user ID and password given in advance to the person in charge 2 to the login UI 900, and presses the login button 901. When the business support device 300 succeeds in authenticating the input user ID and password, the business support device 300 provides the service menu UI 910 shown in FIG. 9 to the terminal 400. The "press" of the button in the description of the UI can be read as another term such as "touch", "tap", "click" or "selection" of the button.
図9に示すように、業務支援装置300は、次の業務支援サービスを提供する。
・欠品に関する情報を提供する欠品情報サービス
・陳列棚の位置情報を提供する棚地図サービス
・商品の注文履歴情報を提供する注文履歴サービス
・棚割に関するアドバイス情報を提供する棚割アドバイスサービス
・棚割の変更を受け付ける棚割変更サービス
・商品の価格の変更を受け付ける価格変更サービス As shown in FIG. 9, thebusiness support device 300 provides the following business support services.
・ Out of stock information service that provides information on shortages ・ Shelf map service that provides location information of display shelves ・ Order history service that provides order history information of products ・ Shelf allocation advice service that provides advice information on shelving allocation ・Shelf allocation change service that accepts changes in shelving allocation ・ Price change service that accepts changes in product prices
・欠品に関する情報を提供する欠品情報サービス
・陳列棚の位置情報を提供する棚地図サービス
・商品の注文履歴情報を提供する注文履歴サービス
・棚割に関するアドバイス情報を提供する棚割アドバイスサービス
・棚割の変更を受け付ける棚割変更サービス
・商品の価格の変更を受け付ける価格変更サービス As shown in FIG. 9, the
・ Out of stock information service that provides information on shortages ・ Shelf map service that provides location information of display shelves ・ Order history service that provides order history information of products ・ Shelf allocation advice service that provides advice information on shelving allocation ・Shelf allocation change service that accepts changes in shelving allocation ・ Price change service that accepts changes in product prices
次に、上記の各業務支援サービスについて説明する。
Next, each of the above business support services will be explained.
<欠品情報サービス>
図10は、欠品情報UIの例を示す図である。サービスメニューUI910から欠品情報サービスが選択された場合、業務支援装置300は、図10に示すような欠品情報UI1000を端末400に提供する。 <Out of stock information service>
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a shortage information UI. When the shortage information service is selected from theservice menu UI 910, the business support device 300 provides the shortage information UI 1000 as shown in FIG. 10 to the terminal 400.
図10は、欠品情報UIの例を示す図である。サービスメニューUI910から欠品情報サービスが選択された場合、業務支援装置300は、図10に示すような欠品情報UI1000を端末400に提供する。 <Out of stock information service>
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a shortage information UI. When the shortage information service is selected from the
欠品情報UI1000は、緊急度領域1001、欠品棚情報領域1002、欠品商品情報領域1003、在庫情報領域1004及び対処領域1005を有する。
The shortage information UI 1000 has an urgency area 1001, a shortage shelf information area 1002, a shortage product information area 1003, an inventory information area 1004, and a coping area 1005.
緊急度領域1001には、欠品商品の補充の緊急度の高さを示す情報(以下「緊急度情報」と称する)が表示される。緊急度情報は、緊急度の高い順に、A,B,Cの値であってよい。業務支援装置300は、欠品商品の棚在庫数や欠品商品の需要情報などに応じて緊急度情報を決定してよい。例えば、業務支援装置300は、欠品商品の棚在庫数がa1未満の場合、緊急度をAに決定し、欠品商品の棚在庫数がa2未満の場合、緊急度をBに決定し、欠品商品の棚在庫数がa3未満の場合、緊急度をCに決定する。a1、a2、a3は、1以上の整数であり、a1<a2<a3である。担当者2は、緊急度情報を参照することにより、欠品商品の補充の緊急性を適切に判断できる。また、安売りなどのマーケティングにより、需要が上がり下がりすることを予測して、需要が増えると予測される前には緊急度を上げるとよい。すなわち、棚に配置される商品の数が減っていないにも関わらず、需要予測などによって、商品の補充が指示され、その緊急度が高く設定される(AやBなどになる)ことがある。
In the urgency area 1001, information indicating the high degree of urgency of replenishment of the out-of-stock product (hereinafter referred to as "urgency information") is displayed. The urgency information may be the values of A, B, and C in descending order of urgency. The business support device 300 may determine the urgency information according to the number of shelves in stock of the out-of-stock product, the demand information of the out-of-stock product, and the like. For example, the business support device 300 determines the urgency to A when the number of shelves in stock of the out-of-stock product is less than a1, and determines the urgency to B when the number of shelves in stock of the out-of-stock product is less than a2. However, if the number of out-of-stock items on the shelves is less than a3 , the urgency is determined to be C. a 1 , a 2 , and a 3 are integers of 1 or more, and a 1 <a 2 <a 3 . The person in charge 2 can appropriately determine the urgency of replenishing the missing product by referring to the urgency information. In addition, it is advisable to predict that demand will rise and fall due to marketing such as bargain sales, and raise the urgency before demand is predicted to increase. That is, even though the number of products placed on the shelves has not decreased, the demand forecast may instruct the product to be replenished and the urgency may be set high (A, B, etc.). ..
欠品棚情報領域1002には、欠品棚及び欠品区画を特定するための情報として、例えば図10に示すように、エリアID、棚ID、棚段及び位置番号、もしくは座標に関する情報が表示される。業務支援装置300は、欠品検知装置200から受信した欠品検知情報に基づいて、これらの情報を特定してよい。
In the out-of-stock shelf information area 1002, as information for identifying the out-of-stock shelf and the out-of-stock section, for example, as shown in FIG. 10, information on an area ID, a shelf ID, a shelf stage and a position number, or coordinates is displayed. Will be done. The business support device 300 may specify such information based on the shortage detection information received from the shortage detection device 200.
また、欠品棚情報領域1002には、欠品棚の位置を地図で表示するためのボタン1006が表示される。このボタン1006が押下された場合、業務支援装置300は、図11に示すような棚地図UI1100を端末400に提供する。なお、棚地図UI1100については後述する(図11参照)。
Further, in the shortage shelf information area 1002, a button 1006 for displaying the position of the shortage shelf on a map is displayed. When this button 1006 is pressed, the business support device 300 provides the shelf map UI 1100 as shown in FIG. 11 to the terminal 400. The shelf map UI1100 will be described later (see FIG. 11).
欠品商品情報領域1003には、欠品商品の商品情報及び不足数が表示される。商品情報は、商品コード及び商品名を含む。例えば、業務支援装置300は、欠品検知装置200から受信した欠品検知情報や商品の需要予測情報から、欠品商品の商品情報及び不足数を特定する。不足数は、欠品検知情報に含まれる陳列可能数に基づいて特定されてもよいし、安売りなどのマーケティングにより、需要が上がり下がりすることを予測して、需要が増えると予測される前には不足数が大きくなるように変化させてもよい。すなわち、棚に配置される商品の数が減っていないにも関わらず、需要予測などによって、商品の補充が指示されたり、その不足数が増加して設定されたりすることがある。この場合、棚在庫の増加により、棚割りまで変更されることもある。また、不足数は、必ずしも商品の絶対的な数でなくてもよく、不足度合いとして、A(1~10)、B(11~20)、C(21~30)などとクラス分けされてもよい。
In the out-of-stock product information area 1003, the product information of the out-of-stock product and the number of shortages are displayed. The product information includes the product code and the product name. For example, the business support device 300 identifies the product information and the number of shortages of the shortage product from the shortage detection information and the demand forecast information of the product received from the shortage detection device 200. The number of shortages may be identified based on the number of items that can be displayed in the shortage detection information, or before the demand is expected to increase by predicting that the demand will rise or fall due to marketing such as bargain sale. May be changed so that the number of shortages becomes large. That is, even though the number of products placed on the shelves has not decreased, the demand forecast may instruct the product to be replenished, or the shortage may be increased and set. In this case, due to the increase in shelf inventory, the shelving allocation may be changed. Further, the number of shortages does not necessarily have to be the absolute number of products, and the degree of shortage may be classified into A (1 to 10), B (11 to 20), C (21 to 30), and the like. good.
在庫情報領域1004には、欠品商品の在庫情報が表示される。在庫情報には、図10に示すように、欠品商品の第1の在庫位置及び在庫数、並びに、欠品商品の第2の在庫位置及び在庫数が含まれてよい。例えば、第1の在庫位置は、陳列棚10と同じエリアに存在する在庫棚の位置であり、第2の在庫位置は、陳列棚10とは異なるエリア(例えば店舗のバックヤード)に存在する在庫棚の位置である。図10の例は、欠品商品が、第1の在庫位置「A-3」に「10個」存在し、第2の在庫位置「DD-47」に「24個」存在していることを示す。業務支援装置300は、例えば、店舗の在庫情報に基づいて、欠品商品が何れの在庫位置に何個在庫しているかを特定する。
Inventory information of out-of-stock products is displayed in the inventory information area 1004. As shown in FIG. 10, the inventory information may include a first inventory position and inventory quantity of the out-of-stock product, and a second inventory position and inventory quantity of the out-of-stock product. For example, the first inventory position is the position of the inventory shelf existing in the same area as the display shelf 10, and the second inventory position is the inventory existing in an area different from the display shelf 10 (for example, the backyard of the store). The position of the shelf. In the example of FIG. 10, there are "10" out-of-stock products in the first inventory position "A-3" and "24" in the second inventory position "DD-47". show. The business support device 300 specifies, for example, how many out-of-stock products are in stock at which inventory position based on the inventory information of the store.
また、在庫情報領域1004には、図10に示すように、第1の在庫位置を地図で表示するためのボタン1007と、第2の在庫位置を地図で表示するためのボタン1008とが表示される。業務支援装置300は、ボタン1007、1008が押下された場合、在庫位置地図UIを端末400に提供する。なお、在庫位置地図UIについては図示しないが、図11に示す棚地図UI1100と同様であってよい。
Further, in the inventory information area 1004, as shown in FIG. 10, a button 1007 for displaying the first inventory position on a map and a button 1008 for displaying the second inventory position on a map are displayed. To. The business support device 300 provides the stock position map UI to the terminal 400 when the buttons 1007 and 1008 are pressed. Although the inventory position map UI is not shown, it may be the same as the shelf map UI 1100 shown in FIG.
また、在庫情報領域1004には、欠品商品を注文するためのボタン1009が表示される。このボタン1009が押下された場合、業務支援装置300は、欠品商品を注文するためのUI(図示せず)を端末400に提供する。
Further, in the inventory information area 1004, a button 1009 for ordering a missing product is displayed. When this button 1009 is pressed, the business support device 300 provides the terminal 400 with a UI (not shown) for ordering a shortage product.
対処領域1005には、欠品商品に対する対処を選択するためのボタンが表示される。例えば、図10に示すように、対処領域1005には、未完了ボタン1010、完了ボタン1011、放置ボタン1012及び注文済ボタン1013が表示される。担当者2は、欠品商品への対処が未完了である場合、未完了ボタン1010を選択してよい。担当者2は、欠品商品への対処が完了済みである場合、完了ボタン1011を選択してよい。担当者2は、欠品商品への対処を放置する場合、放置ボタン1012を選択してよい。担当者2は、欠品商品の注文を完了済みである場合、注文済ボタン1013を選択してよい。業務支援装置300は、選択されたボタンに対応する対処の情報を、欠品対処履歴情報として記録する。
In the handling area 1005, a button for selecting a handling for the out-of-stock product is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 10, in the coping area 1005, an incomplete button 1010, a completed button 1011, a neglected button 1012, and an ordered button 1013 are displayed. The person in charge 2 may select the incomplete button 1010 when the handling of the out-of-stock product is incomplete. The person in charge 2 may select the completion button 1011 when the handling of the out-of-stock product has been completed. The person in charge 2 may select the leave button 1012 when leaving the handling of the out-of-stock product. The person in charge 2 may select the ordered button 1013 when the order for the out-of-stock product has been completed. The business support device 300 records the handling information corresponding to the selected button as the shortage handling history information.
なお、欠品情報UI1000には、欠品の発生を識別するための欠品発生IDが表示されてよい。図10に示す「K19-114」は、欠品発生IDの表示例である。
The shortage information UI1000 may display a shortage occurrence ID for identifying the occurrence of a shortage. “K19-114” shown in FIG. 10 is a display example of a shortage occurrence ID.
また、図10において、左矢印ボタン1014、右矢印ボタン1015は、別の欠品発生IDに対応する欠品情報UI1000に表示を切り替えるためのボタンである。例えば、業務支援装置300は、左矢印ボタン1014が押下された場合、前の欠品発生IDに対応する欠品情報UIを端末400に提供し、右矢印ボタン1015が押下された場合、次の欠品発生IDに対応する欠品情報UIを端末400に提供する。
Further, in FIG. 10, the left arrow button 1014 and the right arrow button 1015 are buttons for switching the display to the shortage information UI 1000 corresponding to another shortage occurrence ID. For example, the business support device 300 provides the terminal 400 with a shortage information UI corresponding to the previous shortage occurrence ID when the left arrow button 1014 is pressed, and when the right arrow button 1015 is pressed, the next The shortage information UI corresponding to the shortage occurrence ID is provided to the terminal 400.
図11は、欠品情報サービスに係る棚地図UIの例を示す図である。図12は、欠品情報サービスに係る陳列棚UIの例を示す図である。業務支援装置300は、欠品情報UI1000の欠品棚情報領域1002におけるボタン1006が押下された場合、図11に示すような棚地図UI1100を端末400に提供する。
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a shelf map UI related to the shortage information service. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a display shelf UI related to a shortage information service. When the button 1006 in the shortage shelf information area 1002 of the shortage information UI 1000 is pressed, the business support device 300 provides the shelf map UI 1100 as shown in FIG. 11 to the terminal 400.
棚地図UI1100には、店舗の陳列棚10の配置を示す棚地図と共に、欠品棚を示す画像が表示される。例えば、欠品棚が、他の陳列棚10と区別可能な態様(例えば異なる色)で表示される。
The shelf map UI1100 displays a shelf map showing the arrangement of the display shelves 10 in the store and an image showing the out-of-stock shelves. For example, the out-of-stock shelves are displayed in a manner distinguishable from the other display shelves 10 (eg, in a different color).
また、棚地図UI1100には、陳列棚10における欠品への対処状況を示す情報が表示される。例えば、図11に示すように、欠品への対処が「未完了」である陳列棚10には二重丸マークが、欠品への対処が「放置」である陳列棚10には黒三角マークが、欠品への対処が「注文済み」である陳列棚10には黒四角マークが表示されてよい。なお、図11に示すマークの表示は一例であり、これらとは異なるマークが表示されてもよい。
In addition, the shelf map UI1100 displays information indicating the status of dealing with shortages in the display shelf 10. For example, as shown in FIG. 11, a double circle mark is displayed on the display shelf 10 in which the response to the shortage is “incomplete”, and a black triangle is displayed on the display shelf 10 in which the response to the shortage is “left”. A black square mark may be displayed on the display shelf 10 for which the mark is "ordered" for dealing with the shortage. The display of the mark shown in FIG. 11 is an example, and a mark different from these may be displayed.
担当者2が、棚地図UI1100から欠品棚を選択した場合、業務支援装置300は、選択された欠品棚に対応する陳列棚UI1200を端末400に提供する。陳列棚UI1200は、図12に示すように、陳列棚10を模式的に示したものである。あるいは、陳列棚UI1200は、カメラ装置100による陳列棚10の撮影画像を用いたものであってもよい。
When the person in charge 2 selects a shortage shelf from the shelf map UI1100, the business support device 300 provides the terminal 400 with a display shelf UI1200 corresponding to the selected shortage shelf. As shown in FIG. 12, the display shelf UI1200 schematically shows the display shelf 10. Alternatively, the display shelf UI1200 may use an image taken by the display shelf 10 by the camera device 100.
陳列棚UI1200において、欠品区画1201は、他の区画30と異なる態様(例えば異なる色)にて表示されてもよい。また、陳列棚UI1200において、注文済みの欠品区画1202は、他の区画30と異なる態様(例えば異なる色)にて表示されてもよい。
In the display shelf UI1200, the shortage section 1201 may be displayed in a mode (for example, a different color) different from that of the other sections 30. Further, in the display shelf UI1200, the ordered shortage section 1202 may be displayed in a mode (for example, a different color) different from that of the other sections 30.
担当者2は、欠品情報サービスを利用することにより、欠品に関する情報を効率的に確認できる。なお、業務支援装置300は、欠品検知装置200から欠品検知情報を受信した場合、欠品情報UI1000をプッシュ通知にて端末400に提示してもよい。これにより、担当者2は、欠品が発生した場合に、欠品商品及び欠品棚を直ちに認識できるので、欠品への対処を素早く行うことができる。
The person in charge 2 can efficiently confirm the information regarding the shortage by using the shortage information service. When the business support device 300 receives the shortage detection information from the shortage detection device 200, the business support device 300 may present the shortage information UI 1000 to the terminal 400 by push notification. As a result, when a shortage occurs, the person in charge 2 can immediately recognize the shortage product and the shortage shelf, so that the shortage can be dealt with quickly.
<棚地図サービス>
図13は、棚地図サービスに係る棚地図UIの例を示す図である。図14は、棚地図サービスに係る陳列棚UIの例を示す図である。サービスメニューUI910から棚地図サービスが選択された場合、業務支援装置300は、図13に示すような棚地図UI1300を端末400に提供する。 <Shelf map service>
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a shelf map UI related to the shelf map service. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a display shelf UI related to the shelf map service. When the shelf map service is selected from theservice menu UI 910, the business support device 300 provides the shelf map UI 1300 as shown in FIG. 13 to the terminal 400.
図13は、棚地図サービスに係る棚地図UIの例を示す図である。図14は、棚地図サービスに係る陳列棚UIの例を示す図である。サービスメニューUI910から棚地図サービスが選択された場合、業務支援装置300は、図13に示すような棚地図UI1300を端末400に提供する。 <Shelf map service>
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a shelf map UI related to the shelf map service. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a display shelf UI related to the shelf map service. When the shelf map service is selected from the
棚地図UI1300において、欠品棚が存在する場合、欠品棚は、欠品が生じていない陳列棚10と異なる態様(例えば異なる色)にて表示されてよい。なお、棚地図UI1300は、図11にて説明した棚地図UI1100とほぼ同様であるので、詳細な説明については省略する。
In the shelf map UI1300, when a shortage shelf exists, the shortage shelf may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a different color) from the display shelf 10 in which no shortage has occurred. Since the shelf map UI 1300 is almost the same as the shelf map UI 1100 described with reference to FIG. 11, detailed description thereof will be omitted.
担当者2が、棚地図UI1300から陳列棚10を選択した場合、業務支援装置300は、図14に示すように、選択された陳列棚10に対応する陳列棚UI1400を端末400に提供する。
When the person in charge 2 selects the display shelf 10 from the shelf map UI 1300, the business support device 300 provides the terminal 400 with the display shelf UI 1400 corresponding to the selected display shelf 10 as shown in FIG.
陳列棚UI1400において、欠品区画が存在する場合、図12と同様、欠品区画は、他の区画30と異なる態様(例えば異なる色)にて表示されてよい。また、陳列棚UI1400において、注文済みの欠品区画が存在する場合、図12と同様、注文済みの欠品区画は、他の区画30と異なる態様(例えば異なる色)にて表示されてよい。なお、陳列棚UI1400は、図12にて説明した陳列棚UI1200とほぼ同様であるので、詳細な説明については省略する。
In the display shelf UI1400, when a shortage section exists, the shortage section may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a different color) from the other sections 30 as in FIG. 12. Further, in the display shelf UI1400, when the ordered shortage section exists, the ordered shortage section may be displayed in a different mode (for example, different color) from the other sections 30 as in FIG. 12. Since the display shelf UI1400 is almost the same as the display shelf UI1200 described with reference to FIG. 12, detailed description thereof will be omitted.
担当者2は、棚地図サービスを利用することにより、棚地図から視覚的に欠品棚を確認できる。
The person in charge 2 can visually confirm the missing shelf from the shelf map by using the shelf map service.
<注文履歴サービス>
図15は、注文履歴UIの例を示す図である。サービスメニューUI910から注文履歴サービスが選択された場合、業務支援装置300は、図15に示すような注文履歴UI1500を端末400に提供する。 <Order history service>
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of an order history UI. When the order history service is selected from theservice menu UI 910, the business support device 300 provides the order history UI 1500 as shown in FIG. 15 to the terminal 400.
図15は、注文履歴UIの例を示す図である。サービスメニューUI910から注文履歴サービスが選択された場合、業務支援装置300は、図15に示すような注文履歴UI1500を端末400に提供する。 <Order history service>
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of an order history UI. When the order history service is selected from the
注文履歴UI1500には、注文された商品ごとの、注文日、注文時刻、欠品棚及び欠品区画の識別情報、商品コード、商品名、注文数、並びに、注文に関するステータスが表示される。業務支援装置300は、注文履歴情報に基づいて、注文履歴UI1500を生成してよい。
The order history UI1500 displays the order date, order time, identification information of the shortage shelf and the shortage section, the product code, the product name, the number of orders, and the status related to the order for each ordered product. The business support device 300 may generate the order history UI 1500 based on the order history information.
担当者2は、注文履歴サービスを利用することにより、欠品に対する注文の履歴情報を容易に確認できる。
The person in charge 2 can easily check the history information of the order for the shortage by using the order history service.
<棚割アドバイスサービス>
図16は、棚割アドバイスサービスに係る棚地図UIの例を示す図である。図17は、棚割アドバイスUIの例を示す図である。サービスメニューUI910から棚割アドバイスサービスが選択された場合、業務支援装置300は、図16に示すような棚地図UI1600を端末400に提供する。なお、棚地図UI1600については、図11にて説明した棚地図UI1100とほぼ同様であるので、詳細な説明については省略する。 <Shelf allocation advice service>
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a shelf map UI related to the shelf allocation advice service. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of a shelf allocation advice UI. When the shelf allocation advice service is selected from theservice menu UI 910, the business support device 300 provides the shelf map UI 1600 as shown in FIG. 16 to the terminal 400. Since the shelf map UI 1600 is almost the same as the shelf map UI 1100 described with reference to FIG. 11, detailed description thereof will be omitted.
図16は、棚割アドバイスサービスに係る棚地図UIの例を示す図である。図17は、棚割アドバイスUIの例を示す図である。サービスメニューUI910から棚割アドバイスサービスが選択された場合、業務支援装置300は、図16に示すような棚地図UI1600を端末400に提供する。なお、棚地図UI1600については、図11にて説明した棚地図UI1100とほぼ同様であるので、詳細な説明については省略する。 <Shelf allocation advice service>
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a shelf map UI related to the shelf allocation advice service. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of a shelf allocation advice UI. When the shelf allocation advice service is selected from the
担当者2が、棚地図UI1600から、棚割のアドバイスを受けたい陳列棚10を選択した場合、業務支援装置300は、図17に示すように、選択された陳列棚10に対応する棚割アドバイスUI1700を端末400に提供する。
When the person in charge 2 selects the display shelf 10 for which shelves allocation advice is desired from the shelf map UI 1600, the business support device 300 provides the shelf allocation advice corresponding to the selected display shelves 10 as shown in FIG. The UI 1700 is provided to the terminal 400.
棚割アドバイスUI1700は、陳列棚領域1701、アドバイス領域1702及び対処領域1703を有する。
The shelf allocation advice UI 1700 has a display shelf area 1701, an advice area 1702, and a coping area 1703.
陳列棚領域1701には、選択された陳列棚における現状の棚割と、アドバイス対象の区画30を特定する情報とが表示される。
In the display shelf area 1701, the current shelf allocation in the selected display shelf and the information for specifying the section 30 to be advised are displayed.
アドバイス領域1702には、アドバイス対象の区画30に対するアドバイスの内容が表示される。例えば、アドバイス領域1702には、図17に示すように、アドバイス対象の区画「1-3」と区画「3-2」の商品の入れ替えをおすすめする文章が表示される。また、アドバイス領域1702には、そのアドバイスの理由が表示されてもよい。例えば、アドバイス領域1702には、図17に示すように、区画「1-3」の欠品回数が「8回」であり、区画「3-2」の欠品回数が「0回」である旨を示す文章が表示される。
In the advice area 1702, the content of the advice for the section 30 to be advised is displayed. For example, in the advice area 1702, as shown in FIG. 17, a sentence recommending the replacement of the products in the section “1-3” and the section “3-2” to be advised is displayed. Further, the reason for the advice may be displayed in the advice area 1702. For example, in the advice area 1702, as shown in FIG. 17, the number of missing items in the section “1-3” is “8 times”, and the number of missing items in the section “3-2” is “0 times”. A sentence indicating that is displayed.
対処領域1703には、アドバイスへの対処を選択するためのボタンが表示される。例えば、図17に示すように、対処領域1703には、対処済みボタン1704、対処不可ボタン1705、保留ボタン1706が表示される。担当者2は、アドバイスへの対処が完了済みである場合、対処済みボタン1704を選択してよい。担当者2は、アドバイスへの対処が不可能な場合、対処不可ボタン1705を選択してよい。担当者2は、アドバイスへの対処を保留する場合、保留ボタン1706を選択してよい。業務支援装置300は、選択されたボタンに対応する対処の情報を、棚割アドバイス対処履歴情報として記録する。
In the coping area 1703, a button for selecting coping with the advice is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 17, in the coping area 1703, the coping button 1704, the coping impossible button 1705, and the hold button 1706 are displayed. The person in charge 2 may select the addressed button 1704 when the response to the advice has been completed. If the person in charge 2 cannot deal with the advice, the person in charge 2 may select the unhandled button 1705. The person in charge 2 may select the hold button 1706 when he / she wants to withhold the response to the advice. The business support device 300 records the handling information corresponding to the selected button as the shelf allocation advice handling history information.
業務支援装置300は、棚割情報及び欠品履歴情報に基づいて、棚割のアドバイスを生成してよい。例えば、業務支援装置300は、欠品が生じた回数がb1回以上の商品の区画30と、欠品が生じた回数がb2回未満の商品の区画30とを入れ替えるアドバイスを生成してよい。b1、b2は、1以上の整数であり、b1>b2である。欠品が頻繁に生じる商品は、人気商品であり、陳列する区画30(つまり棚割)を変えても十分に売れると考えられ、欠品があまり生じない商品は、認知が不十分であり、陳列する区画30(つまり棚割)を変えることにより販売数が増加する余地があると考えられるためである。
The business support device 300 may generate shelving allocation advice based on the shelving allocation information and the shortage history information. For example, the business support device 300 generates advice for exchanging a product section 30 in which the number of times of shortage occurs is b 1 or more and a product section 30 in which the number of times of shortage occurs is less than b 2 times. good. b 1 and b 2 are integers of 1 or more, and b 1 > b 2 . Products that frequently run out of stock are popular products, and it is considered that they will sell well even if the display area 30 (that is, shelving allocation) is changed. This is because it is considered that there is room for increasing the number of sales by changing the display area 30 (that is, the shelf allocation).
なお、棚割アドバイスUI1700には、アドバイスを識別するためのアドバイスIDが表示されてよい。図17に示す「A19-21」は、アドバイスIDの表示例である。
The shelf allocation advice UI1700 may display an advice ID for identifying the advice. “A19-21” shown in FIG. 17 is a display example of the advice ID.
また、棚割アドバイスUI1700には、表示中の陳列棚10の棚割を変更するための棚割UI(図18参照)へ遷移するためのボタン(図示せず)が表示されてもよい。
Further, the shelf allocation advice UI 1700 may display a button (not shown) for transitioning to the shelf allocation UI (see FIG. 18) for changing the shelf allocation of the displayed display shelf 10.
担当者2は、棚割アドバイスサービスを利用することにより、販売実績が向上し得る棚割を知ることができる。
Person in charge 2 can know the shelving allocation that can improve the sales performance by using the shelving allocation advice service.
<棚割変更サービス>
図18は、棚割変更UIの例を示す図である。サービスメニューUI910から棚割変更サービスが選択された場合、業務支援装置300は、図18に示す棚割変更UI1800を端末400に提供する。 <Shelf allocation change service>
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of a shelf allocation change UI. When the shelf allocation change service is selected from theservice menu UI 910, the business support device 300 provides the shelf allocation change UI 1800 shown in FIG. 18 to the terminal 400.
図18は、棚割変更UIの例を示す図である。サービスメニューUI910から棚割変更サービスが選択された場合、業務支援装置300は、図18に示す棚割変更UI1800を端末400に提供する。 <Shelf allocation change service>
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of a shelf allocation change UI. When the shelf allocation change service is selected from the
棚割変更UI1800は、棚領域1801及び商品入力領域1802を有する。
The shelf allocation change UI 1800 has a shelf area 1801 and a product input area 1802.
棚領域1801には、現状の棚割の区画30が表示される。担当者2は、棚領域1801の区画30を操作して、区画30の拡大及び縮小、並びに、区画30の入れ替え等を行うことができる。例えば、担当者2は、区画1803を選択して、区画1803の左辺を矢印1804の方向にスライドすることにより、区画1803を拡大することができる。
In the shelf area 1801, the current shelf allocation section 30 is displayed. The person in charge 2 can operate the compartment 30 of the shelf area 1801 to expand and contract the compartment 30, replace the compartment 30, and the like. For example, the person in charge 2 can expand the section 1803 by selecting the section 1803 and sliding the left side of the section 1803 in the direction of the arrow 1804.
商品入力領域1802には、区画30に陳列する商品の商品情報が入力される。担当者2が、棚領域1801の区画30を選択して、当該区画30に陳列する商品の商品情報を商品入力領域1802に入力した場合、業務支援装置300は、選択された区画30に対して商品入力領域1802に入力された商品情報を対応付けるよう、棚割情報を更新する。なお、担当者2は、商品入力領域1802に、商品情報を手動で入力してよい。あるいは、担当者2は、商品に付されているバーコード(又はQRコード(登録商標))を端末400のカメラで読み取ることによって、商品入力領域1802に商品情報を入力してもよい。
In the product input area 1802, the product information of the product to be displayed in the section 30 is input. When the person in charge 2 selects the section 30 of the shelf area 1801 and inputs the product information of the products to be displayed in the section 30 into the product input area 1802, the business support device 300 requests the selected section 30. The shelving allocation information is updated so as to associate the product information input in the product input area 1802. The person in charge 2 may manually input the product information in the product input area 1802. Alternatively, the person in charge 2 may input the product information in the product input area 1802 by reading the barcode (or QR code (registered trademark)) attached to the product with the camera of the terminal 400.
確定ボタン1805が押下された場合、業務支援装置300は、変更後の区画30及び/又は商品情報に基づいて棚割情報を更新する。
When the confirmation button 1805 is pressed, the business support device 300 updates the shelving allocation information based on the changed section 30 and / or the product information.
なお、棚領域1801には、現状の棚割の区画30に代えて、推奨する棚割の区画30が表示されてもよい。例えば、業務支援装置300は、棚割情報及び欠品履歴情報に基づいて、上述した棚割のアドバイスと同様の方法によって、推奨する棚割の区画30を決定する。
In the shelf area 1801, the recommended shelf allocation section 30 may be displayed instead of the current shelf allocation section 30. For example, the business support device 300 determines the recommended shelf allocation section 30 by the same method as the above-mentioned shelf allocation advice based on the shelf allocation information and the shortage history information.
担当者2は、棚割変更サービスを利用することにより、棚割の変更を簡単に業務支援装置300に伝えることができる。
The person in charge 2 can easily notify the business support device 300 of the change of the shelf allocation by using the shelf allocation change service.
<価格変更サービス>
図19は、価格変更UIの例を示す図である。サービスメニューUI910から価格変更サービスが選択された場合、業務支援装置300は、図19に示す価格変更UI1900を端末400に提供する。 <Price change service>
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a price change UI. When the price change service is selected from theservice menu UI 910, the business support device 300 provides the price change UI 1900 shown in FIG. 19 to the terminal 400.
図19は、価格変更UIの例を示す図である。サービスメニューUI910から価格変更サービスが選択された場合、業務支援装置300は、図19に示す価格変更UI1900を端末400に提供する。 <Price change service>
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a price change UI. When the price change service is selected from the
価格変更UI1900には、価格が変更された商品ごとの、価格変更日、価格変更時刻、商品が陳列されている陳列棚10及び区画30の識別情報、商品コード、商品名、変更前価格及び変更後価格が表示される。
In the price change UI 1900, the price change date, the price change time, the identification information of the display shelf 10 and the section 30 on which the product is displayed, the product code, the product name, the price before the change and the change are provided for each product whose price has been changed. The post-price is displayed.
変更後価格は、業務支援装置300によって決定されてもよい。また、担当者2は、価格変更UI1900から、変更後価格を選択し、業務支援装置300によって決定された変更後価格を再変更できてもよい。
The changed price may be determined by the business support device 300. Further, the person in charge 2 may select the changed price from the price change UI 1900 and re-change the changed price determined by the business support device 300.
確定ボタン1805が押下された場合、業務支援装置300は、変更後価格を、価格情報に記憶する。また、確定ボタン1805が押下された場合、業務支援装置300は、棚札20の表示価格を、変更後価格に更新する。なお、業務支援装置300は、区画30の変更に応じて、商品の価格を変更してもよい。
When the confirmation button 1805 is pressed, the business support device 300 stores the changed price in the price information. Further, when the confirmation button 1805 is pressed, the business support device 300 updates the display price of the shelf label 20 to the changed price. The business support device 300 may change the price of the product according to the change of the section 30.
担当者2は、価格変更サービスを利用することにより、陳列棚10における棚札20の表示価格を効率的に変更できる。
The person in charge 2 can efficiently change the displayed price of the shelf tag 20 on the display shelf 10 by using the price change service.
<業務支援サービスの変形例>
業務支援装置300は、担当者2から指定された店舗及び/又はエリアにおける、各商品の欠品の度合いを示す情報を、端末400に提供してもよい。業務支援装置300は、すべての店舗における、各商品の欠品の度合いを示す情報を、端末400に提供してもよい。 <Modification example of business support service>
Thebusiness support device 300 may provide the terminal 400 with information indicating the degree of shortage of each product in the store and / or area designated by the person in charge 2. The business support device 300 may provide the terminal 400 with information indicating the degree of shortage of each product in all stores.
業務支援装置300は、担当者2から指定された店舗及び/又はエリアにおける、各商品の欠品の度合いを示す情報を、端末400に提供してもよい。業務支援装置300は、すべての店舗における、各商品の欠品の度合いを示す情報を、端末400に提供してもよい。 <Modification example of business support service>
The
<陳列棚の区画を自動的に設定する方法>
次に、欠品検知装置200において自動的に区画30を設定する方法の例について説明する。 <How to automatically set the display shelf compartment>
Next, an example of a method of automatically setting thesection 30 in the shortage detection device 200 will be described.
次に、欠品検知装置200において自動的に区画30を設定する方法の例について説明する。 <How to automatically set the display shelf compartment>
Next, an example of a method of automatically setting the
図20は、棚札20の検知方法の一例を説明するための図である。
FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining an example of a detection method for the shelf label 20.
例えば、欠品検知装置200は、図20に示す陳列棚10の撮影画像を分析し、下からm段目の棚板11に付されている、左からn番目の棚札20及び左からn+1番目の棚札20を検知する。同様に、欠品検知装置200は、下からm+1段目の棚板11に付されている、左からn番目の棚札20、左からn+1番目の棚札20、及び、左からn+2番目の棚札20を検知する。同様に、欠品検知装置200は、下からm+2段目の棚板11に付されている、左からn番目の棚札20、左からn+1番目の棚札20、及び、左からn+2番目の棚札20を検知する。m、nは1以上の整数である。このように、欠品検知装置200は、棚段ごとに、左から右へ棚札20を検知してよい。なお、左から右への検知は一例であり、欠品検知装置200は、右から左へ棚札20を検知してもよい。
For example, the shortage detection device 200 analyzes the photographed image of the display shelf 10 shown in FIG. 20, and is attached to the shelf board 11 on the m-th stage from the bottom, the nth shelf label 20 from the left and n + 1 from the left. The second shelf label 20 is detected. Similarly, the shortage detection device 200 is attached to the shelf board 11 on the m + 1st stage from the bottom, the nth shelf label 20 from the left, the n + 1th shelf label 20 from the left, and the n + second shelf label from the left. Detects the shelf tag 20. Similarly, the shortage detection device 200 is attached to the m + 2nd shelf board 11 from the bottom, the nth shelf label 20 from the left, the n + 1th shelf label 20 from the left, and the n + 2nd shelf label from the left. Detects the shelf tag 20. m and n are integers of 1 or more. In this way, the shortage detection device 200 may detect the shelf tag 20 from left to right for each shelf stage. Note that the detection from left to right is an example, and the shortage detection device 200 may detect the shelf label 20 from right to left.
図21は、区画30の設定方法の一例を説明するための図である。
FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining an example of a setting method of the section 30.
欠品検知装置200は、上記のように検知した棚札20の位置に基づいて、当該棚札20に対応する区画30を設定する。例えば、共通の商品が陳列されている区画30の左下に当該商品に対応するm段目n番目の棚札20が付されている場合、欠品検知装置200は、次の処理を行う。すなわち、欠品検知装置200は、m段目n番目の棚札20の位置から、m段目n+1番目(つまり右隣)の棚札20の位置までの幅Rxを区画30の幅とし、m段目n番目の棚札20の位置から、m+1段目n番目(つまり上段)の棚札20の位置までの高さRyを区画30の高さとする。そして、欠品検知装置200は、このように設定した区画30を、m段目n番目の棚札20と対応付ける。
The shortage detection device 200 sets a section 30 corresponding to the shelf label 20 based on the position of the shelf label 20 detected as described above. For example, when the m-th row nth shelf label 20 corresponding to the product is attached to the lower left of the section 30 where the common product is displayed, the shortage detection device 200 performs the following processing. That is, in the shortage detection device 200, the width Rx from the position of the nth shelf label 20 in the mth stage to the position of the shelf label 20 in the mth stage n + 1st (that is, to the right) is set as the width of the section 30. The height Ry from the position of the nth shelf label 20 in the row to the position of the nth shelf label 20 in the m + 1st stage (that is, the upper row) is defined as the height of the section 30. Then, the shortage detection device 200 associates the section 30 set in this way with the nth shelf tag 20 in the m-th stage.
このようにして、欠品検知装置200は、m段目n番目の棚札20に対応する区画30を、自動的に設定することができる。
In this way, the shortage detection device 200 can automatically set the section 30 corresponding to the nth shelf tag 20 in the mth stage.
なお、陳列棚10の区画30を自動的に設定する方法は、上述の方法に限定されない。例えば、欠品検知装置200は、棚札20の下方の区画30と当該棚札20とを対応付けてもよい。欠品検知装置200は、棚札20を中心とした所定の幅Rxを区画30の幅としてもよい。欠品検知装置200は、陳列スペース12を等間隔に分割した各々を、区画30に設定してもよい。欠品検知装置200は、陳列スペース12に物理的に存在する仕切り板に基づいて、区画30を設定してもよい。また、商品の陳列前に、業務支援装置300において、陳列する商品を含む陳列棚10の区画30を決定して、端末400に提供してもよい。店舗側の事情により区画30等を変更したい場合は、上記した図18に示す棚割変更UI1800により指示をすればよい。
The method for automatically setting the section 30 of the display shelf 10 is not limited to the above method. For example, the shortage detection device 200 may associate the lower section 30 of the shelf tag 20 with the shelf tag 20. The shortage detection device 200 may have a predetermined width Rx centered on the shelf tag 20 as the width of the section 30. The shortage detection device 200 may divide the display space 12 into equal intervals and set each of the display spaces 12 in the compartment 30. The shortage detection device 200 may set the section 30 based on the partition plate physically present in the display space 12. Further, before the product is displayed, the business support device 300 may determine the section 30 of the display shelf 10 including the product to be displayed and provide it to the terminal 400. If it is desired to change the section 30 or the like due to the circumstances of the store, the instruction may be given by the shelf allocation change UI 1800 shown in FIG. 18 above.
<変形例>
欠品検知装置200の機能は、業務支援装置300に含まれてよい。この場合、業務支援装置300は、カメラ装置100から通信ネットワーク3を介して撮影画像を受信し、上述した欠品検知装置200と同様、陳列棚10における区画30の設定、棚割情報210の生成、及び欠品検知などを実行してよい。 <Modification example>
The function of theshortage detection device 200 may be included in the business support device 300. In this case, the business support device 300 receives the captured image from the camera device 100 via the communication network 3, and similarly to the above-mentioned shortage detection device 200, the section 30 is set in the display shelf 10 and the shelf allocation information 210 is generated. , And shortage detection and the like may be executed.
欠品検知装置200の機能は、業務支援装置300に含まれてよい。この場合、業務支援装置300は、カメラ装置100から通信ネットワーク3を介して撮影画像を受信し、上述した欠品検知装置200と同様、陳列棚10における区画30の設定、棚割情報210の生成、及び欠品検知などを実行してよい。 <Modification example>
The function of the
<実施の形態1のまとめ>
実施の形態1に係る業務支援装置(300)は、物品の陳列棚(10)の撮影画像に基づいて欠品の生じた陳列棚である欠品棚を検知する欠品検知装置(200)から、欠品棚に関する情報を受信する受信部(303B)と、欠品棚に関する情報と、陳列棚の配置を示す棚地図情報とに基づいて、欠品棚の位置を特定し、欠品棚の位置を示す情報を含む業務支援情報を生成する処理部(301)と、業務支援情報を端末(400)に送信する送信部(303A)と、を備える。これにより、端末は、欠品棚の位置を示す情報を表示できる。よって、担当者は、端末を通じて、欠品棚の位置を認識できるので、欠品に関する業務を効率化できる。 <Summary ofEmbodiment 1>
The business support device (300) according to the first embodiment is from a shortage detection device (200) that detects a shortage shelf, which is a display shelf in which a shortage has occurred, based on a photographed image of the display shelf (10) of goods. Based on the receiving unit (303B) that receives information about the shortage shelves, the information about the shortage shelves, and the shelf map information indicating the arrangement of the display shelves, the position of the shortage shelves is specified, and the shortage shelves are located. It includes a processing unit (301) that generates business support information including information indicating a position, and a transmission unit (303A) that transmits business support information to a terminal (400). As a result, the terminal can display information indicating the position of the out-of-stock shelf. Therefore, the person in charge can recognize the position of the shortage shelf through the terminal, so that the work related to the shortage can be streamlined.
実施の形態1に係る業務支援装置(300)は、物品の陳列棚(10)の撮影画像に基づいて欠品の生じた陳列棚である欠品棚を検知する欠品検知装置(200)から、欠品棚に関する情報を受信する受信部(303B)と、欠品棚に関する情報と、陳列棚の配置を示す棚地図情報とに基づいて、欠品棚の位置を特定し、欠品棚の位置を示す情報を含む業務支援情報を生成する処理部(301)と、業務支援情報を端末(400)に送信する送信部(303A)と、を備える。これにより、端末は、欠品棚の位置を示す情報を表示できる。よって、担当者は、端末を通じて、欠品棚の位置を認識できるので、欠品に関する業務を効率化できる。 <Summary of
The business support device (300) according to the first embodiment is from a shortage detection device (200) that detects a shortage shelf, which is a display shelf in which a shortage has occurred, based on a photographed image of the display shelf (10) of goods. Based on the receiving unit (303B) that receives information about the shortage shelves, the information about the shortage shelves, and the shelf map information indicating the arrangement of the display shelves, the position of the shortage shelves is specified, and the shortage shelves are located. It includes a processing unit (301) that generates business support information including information indicating a position, and a transmission unit (303A) that transmits business support information to a terminal (400). As a result, the terminal can display information indicating the position of the out-of-stock shelf. Therefore, the person in charge can recognize the position of the shortage shelf through the terminal, so that the work related to the shortage can be streamlined.
処理部(301)は、端末(400)が欠品棚を他の陳列棚(10)と異なる態様にて表示するための情報を業務支援情報に含めてよい。これにより、端末は、欠品棚を他の陳列棚と異なる態様にて表示できる。よって、担当者は、端末を通じて、欠品棚を視覚的に認識できるので、欠品に関する業務を効率化できる。
The processing unit (301) may include information for the terminal (400) to display the shortage shelf in a mode different from that of the other display shelves (10) in the business support information. As a result, the terminal can display the shortage shelf in a manner different from that of other display shelves. Therefore, the person in charge can visually recognize the shortage shelf through the terminal, so that the work related to the shortage can be streamlined.
受信部(303B)は、端末(400)に入力された、欠品棚への対処を示す情報を受信し、処理部(301)は、欠品棚への対処を示す情報を、業務支援情報に含めてよい。これにより、端末(400)は、欠品棚に対する欠品への対処を示す情報を表示できる。よって、担当者は、端末を通じて、欠品棚に対する現時点における欠品への対処を認識できるので、欠品に関する業務を効率化できる。
The receiving unit (303B) receives the information input to the terminal (400) indicating the handling of the shortage shelf, and the processing unit (301) receives the information indicating the handling of the shortage shelf as business support information. May be included in. As a result, the terminal (400) can display information indicating how to deal with the shortage of the shortage shelf. Therefore, since the person in charge can recognize the current response to the shortage of the shortage shelf through the terminal, the work related to the shortage can be streamlined.
処理部(301)は、欠品が生じた物品に関する情報、及び、当該欠品が生じた物品の在庫に関する情報を、業務支援情報に含めてよい。これにより、端末は、欠品が生じた物品に関する情報、及び、欠品が生じた物品の在庫に関する情報を表示できる。よって、担当者は、端末を通じて、欠品が生じた物品に関する情報と、その欠品が生じた物品の在庫に関する情報とを認識できるので、欠品に対する業務を効率化できる。
The processing unit (301) may include information on the goods in which the shortage has occurred and information on the inventory of the goods in which the shortage has occurred in the business support information. As a result, the terminal can display information on the goods in which the shortage has occurred and information on the inventory of the goods in which the shortage has occurred. Therefore, the person in charge can recognize the information on the product in which the shortage has occurred and the information on the inventory of the product in which the shortage has occurred through the terminal, so that the work for the shortage can be made more efficient.
処理部(301)は、欠品が生じた物品の在庫の状況を示す情報に基づいて、当該欠品が生じた物品の補充の緊急度を決定し、当該緊急度を示す情報を、業務支援情報に含めてよい。これにより、端末は、欠品が生じた物品の補充の緊急度を表示できる。よって、担当者は、端末を通じて、欠品が生じた物品の補充の緊急度を認識できるので、欠品に関する業務を効率化できる。
The processing unit (301) determines the urgency of replenishment of the goods with the shortage based on the information indicating the inventory status of the goods with the shortage, and provides the information indicating the urgency to the business support. May be included in the information. This allows the terminal to display the urgency of replenishing the missing item. Therefore, the person in charge can recognize the urgency of replenishing the article in which the shortage has occurred through the terminal, so that the work related to the shortage can be streamlined.
欠品棚に関する情報には、欠品検知装置(200)によって検知された、欠品棚における欠品が生じた区画(30)である欠品区画の識別情報が含まれてよい。処理部(301)は、端末(400)が欠品区画を他の区画(30)と異なる態様にて表示するための情報を、業務支援情報に含めてよい。これにより、端末は、欠品区画を他の区画と異なる態様にて表示できる。よって、担当者は、端末を通じて、欠品区画を視覚的に認識できるので、欠品に関する業務を効率化できる。
The information regarding the out-of-stock shelf may include identification information of the out-of-stock section, which is the section (30) in which the out-of-stock has occurred in the out-of-stock shelf, which is detected by the out-of-stock detection device (200). The processing unit (301) may include information for the terminal (400) to display the shortage section in a mode different from that of the other sections (30) in the business support information. As a result, the terminal can display the shortage section in a manner different from that of other sections. Therefore, the person in charge can visually recognize the shortage section through the terminal, so that the work related to the shortage can be streamlined.
処理部(301)は、区画(30)における欠品に関する履歴情報に基づいて、区画の変更に関する情報を生成し、業務支援情報に含めてよい。これにより、端末は、陳列棚の区画の変更に関する情報(例えば棚割のアドバイス情報)を表示できる。よって、担当者は、端末を通じて、陳列棚のより適切な区画への変更を認識できるので、棚割に関する業務を効率化できる。
The processing unit (301) may generate information on the change of the section based on the history information on the shortage in the section (30) and include it in the business support information. As a result, the terminal can display information regarding the change of the display shelf section (for example, shelving allocation advice information). Therefore, the person in charge can recognize the change of the display shelf to a more appropriate section through the terminal, and can streamline the work related to the shelving allocation.
(実施の形態2)
実施の形態2では、端末400における欠品通知に関する他のUIについて説明する。なお、実施の形態2では、実施の形態1で説明済みの内容については、同一の参照符号を付し、説明を省略する場合がある。また、以下の説明において、端末400を主体として記載される処理は、端末400の処理部401によって実行される処理であってよい。 (Embodiment 2)
In the second embodiment, another UI related to the shortage notification in the terminal 400 will be described. In the second embodiment, the same reference numerals may be given to the contents described in the first embodiment, and the description may be omitted. Further, in the following description, the process described mainly for the terminal 400 may be a process executed by theprocessing unit 401 of the terminal 400.
実施の形態2では、端末400における欠品通知に関する他のUIについて説明する。なお、実施の形態2では、実施の形態1で説明済みの内容については、同一の参照符号を付し、説明を省略する場合がある。また、以下の説明において、端末400を主体として記載される処理は、端末400の処理部401によって実行される処理であってよい。 (Embodiment 2)
In the second embodiment, another UI related to the shortage notification in the terminal 400 will be described. In the second embodiment, the same reference numerals may be given to the contents described in the first embodiment, and the description may be omitted. Further, in the following description, the process described mainly for the terminal 400 may be a process executed by the
<通知UI>
図22は、端末400における通知UIの一例を示す図である。端末400は、業務支援装置300から欠品通知を受信した場合、図22に示すように、通知UI2000を表示部405に表示する。 <Notification UI>
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of the notification UI in theterminal 400. When the terminal 400 receives the shortage notification from the business support device 300, the terminal 400 displays the notification UI 2000 on the display unit 405 as shown in FIG. 22.
図22は、端末400における通知UIの一例を示す図である。端末400は、業務支援装置300から欠品通知を受信した場合、図22に示すように、通知UI2000を表示部405に表示する。 <Notification UI>
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of the notification UI in the
通知UI2000は、通知画像2001を含む。通知画像2001は、例えば、欠品通知を示すアイコン2002、欠品を検知したことを示す文章2003、欠品を検知した時刻2004、及び、欠品の状況を示す情報2005を含む。
The notification UI 2000 includes the notification image 2001. The notification image 2001 includes, for example, an icon 2002 indicating a shortage notification, a sentence 2003 indicating that the shortage is detected, a time 2004 when the shortage is detected, and information 2005 indicating the status of the shortage.
欠品の状況を示す情報2005は、例えば、完全欠品の件数2006A及び部分欠品の件数2006Bを含んでよい。完全欠品は、欠品検知された商品が陳列棚においてすべて欠品していることを意味する。部分欠品は、欠品検知された商品が陳列棚において部分的に欠品していることを意味する。例えば、複数の列に並べて配置されている商品において、ある1列が欠品している場合、及び/又は、あらかじめ定めた数量若しくはスペースよりも少なくなっている場合等々、これらを部分欠品という。
The information 2005 indicating the status of the shortage may include, for example, the number of complete shortages 2006A and the number of partial shortages 2006B. Complete shortage means that all the products detected as out of stock are out of stock on the display shelf. Partial shortage means that the product for which the shortage is detected is partially out of stock on the display shelf. For example, in a product arranged side by side in a plurality of rows, if one row is out of stock and / or if it is less than a predetermined quantity or space, these are called partial shortages. ..
業務支援装置300が端末400に対して欠品通知を行う間隔は、業務支援装置300が欠品検知装置200から欠品の検知を示す情報(以下「欠品検知情報」という)を取得する間隔よりも長くてよい。例えば、業務支援装置300は、欠品検知装置200から5分間隔で欠品検知情報を取得する。そして、業務支援装置300は、取得した欠品検知情報に基づいて欠品通知を行うか否かを判定し、欠品通知を行うと判定した場合、定期的なタイミング(以下「欠品通知タイミング」という)にて欠品通知を行う。欠品通知タイミングは、毎時0分、15分、30分、45分といった定期的な時刻として設定されてもよい。あるいは、欠品通知タイミングは、15分間隔又は30分間隔といった周期として設定されてもよい。
The interval at which the business support device 300 notifies the terminal 400 of a shortage is the interval at which the business support device 300 acquires information indicating detection of a shortage (hereinafter referred to as “out of stock detection information”) from the shortage detection device 200. May be longer than. For example, the business support device 300 acquires out-of-stock detection information from the out-of-stock detection device 200 at 5-minute intervals. Then, the business support device 300 determines whether or not to perform the shortage notification based on the acquired shortage detection information, and when it is determined to perform the shortage notification, the periodic timing (hereinafter, "outage notification timing"). ”) To notify you of the shortage. The out-of-stock notification timing may be set as a periodic time such as 0 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, and 45 minutes every hour. Alternatively, the shortage notification timing may be set as a cycle such as a 15-minute interval or a 30-minute interval.
なお、業務支援装置300は、店舗の営業時間内(例えば8時~22時の間)に欠品通知を行い、店舗の営業時間外に欠品通知を行わない設定を有してもよい。また、業務支援装置300は、欠品通知タイミングにおいて、店舗にて発生中の複数の欠品をまとめて欠品通知を行ってもよい。また、業務支援装置300は、完全欠品又は部分欠品を検知した場合に欠品通知を行ってよい。あるいは、業務支援装置300は、完全欠品を検知した場合に欠品通知を行い、部分欠品を検知した場合に欠品通知を行わなくてもよい。
The business support device 300 may be set to notify the shortage during the business hours of the store (for example, between 8:00 and 22:00) and not to notify the shortage outside the business hours of the store. Further, the business support device 300 may collectively notify the shortage of a plurality of shortages occurring in the store at the shortage notification timing. Further, the business support device 300 may give a shortage notification when it detects a complete shortage or a partial shortage. Alternatively, the business support device 300 may give a shortage notification when it detects a complete shortage, and may not give a shortage notification when it detects a partial shortage.
また、業務支援装置300は、前回の欠品通知タイミングにて通知済みの欠品については、今回の欠品通知タイミングにおいて再通知しなくてもよい。例えば、業務支援装置300は、前回の欠品通知タイミングにて取得済みの欠品検知情報と同じ欠品検知情報を今回の欠品通知タイミングでも取得した場合、その同じ欠品検知情報を通知判定の対象から除外してもよい。
Further, the business support device 300 does not have to re-notify the shortage that has been notified at the previous shortage notification timing at the current shortage notification timing. For example, when the business support device 300 acquires the same out-of-stock detection information as the out-of-stock detection information acquired at the previous out-of-stock notification timing at the current out-of-stock notification timing, the same out-of-stock detection information is notified and determined. It may be excluded from the target of.
業務支援装置300は、上述のように欠品通知を制御することにより、端末400に対して過度な欠品通知が行われることを抑止できる。これにより、端末400に対する欠品通知の有用性及び信頼性が向上するので、担当者2は、端末400の欠品通知を通じて、欠品に対する業務(例えば欠品商品の補充)を効率的に行うことができる。また、端末400に対する過度な欠品通知が抑制されるので、通信ネットワーク3におけるトラフィック負荷を抑制できる。
By controlling the shortage notification as described above, the business support device 300 can prevent the terminal 400 from being excessively notified of the shortage. As a result, the usefulness and reliability of the shortage notification for the terminal 400 are improved, so that the person in charge 2 efficiently performs the work for the shortage (for example, replenishment of the shortage product) through the shortage notification of the terminal 400. be able to. Further, since the excessive notification of shortage of goods to the terminal 400 is suppressed, the traffic load on the communication network 3 can be suppressed.
業務支援装置300は、欠品検知装置200から取得した直近の複数の欠品検知情報に基づいて、端末400に対する欠品通知を行うか否かを判定してよい。例えば、業務支援装置300は、次の判定方法1~2の何れかによって、欠品通知を行うか否かを判定してよい。
The business support device 300 may determine whether or not to notify the terminal 400 of the shortage based on the latest plurality of shortage detection information acquired from the shortage detection device 200. For example, the business support device 300 may determine whether or not to give a shortage notification by any of the following determination methods 1 and 2.
<<判定方法1>>
業務支援装置300は、欠品検知装置200から取得した直近の2以上の欠品検知情報うち何れもが「欠品あり」を示す場合、端末400に対する欠品通知を行うと判定し、当該2以上の欠品検知情報のうち何れもが「欠品なし」を示す場合、端末400に対する欠品通知を行わないと判定する。また、業務支援装置300は、「欠品あり」及び「欠品なし」の観点において、当該2以上の欠品検知情報のうちの少なくとも1つが他と異なる場合、前回の欠品通知の判定と同じ判定とする。 <<Judgment method 1 >>
When any of the two or more latest shortage detection information acquired from theshortage detection device 200 indicates "out of stock", the business support device 300 determines that the terminal 400 is notified of the shortage, and the 2 is When any of the above-mentioned shortage detection information indicates "no shortage", it is determined that the terminal 400 is not notified of the shortage. Further, when at least one of the two or more shortage detection information is different from the others from the viewpoint of "with shortage" and "without shortage", the business support device 300 determines the previous shortage notification. The same judgment is made.
業務支援装置300は、欠品検知装置200から取得した直近の2以上の欠品検知情報うち何れもが「欠品あり」を示す場合、端末400に対する欠品通知を行うと判定し、当該2以上の欠品検知情報のうち何れもが「欠品なし」を示す場合、端末400に対する欠品通知を行わないと判定する。また、業務支援装置300は、「欠品あり」及び「欠品なし」の観点において、当該2以上の欠品検知情報のうちの少なくとも1つが他と異なる場合、前回の欠品通知の判定と同じ判定とする。 <<
When any of the two or more latest shortage detection information acquired from the
例えば、業務支援装置300は、12時15分の10分前、5分前及び0分前にそれぞれ取得した欠品検知情報が何れも「欠品あり」を示す場合、12時15分の欠品通知タイミングにて欠品通知を行うと判定し、12時15分の10分前、5分前及び0分前にそれぞれ取得した欠品検知情報が何れも「欠品なし」を示す場合、12時15分にタイミングにて欠品通知を行わないと判定する。また、業務支援装置300は、12時15分の10分前に取得した欠品検知情報が「欠品あり」を示し、12時15分の5分前及び0分前に取得した欠品検知情報が「欠品なし」を示す場合、12時15分の欠品通知タイミング(今回の欠品通知タイミング)における欠品通知の判定を、12時0分の欠品通知タイミング(前回の欠品通知タイミング)における欠品通知の判定と同じ判定とする。
For example, when the shortage detection information acquired before 12:15, 5 minutes, and 0 minutes, respectively, indicates "out of stock", the business support device 300 is out of stock at 12:15. When it is determined that the shortage notification will be performed at the product notification timing, and the shortage detection information acquired 10 minutes before 12:15, 5 minutes before, and 0 minutes before indicates "no shortage". It is determined that the out-of-stock notification will not be given at the timing of 12:15. In addition, the business support device 300 indicates that the shortage detection information acquired before 12:15:10 indicates "there is a shortage", and the shortage detection acquired before 5 minutes and 0 minutes before 12:15. When the information indicates "no shortage", the judgment of the shortage notification at the shortage notification timing at 12:15 (this shortage notification timing) is determined, and the shortage notification timing at 12:00 (previous shortage notification timing) is determined. The judgment is the same as the judgment of the shortage notification in the notification timing).
<<判定方法2>>
業務支援装置300は、欠品検知装置200から取得した直近の2以上の欠品検知情報のうち過半数が「欠品あり」を示す場合、端末400に対する欠品通知を行うと判定し、当該2以上の欠品検知情報のうち過半数が「欠品なし」を示す場合、端末400に対する欠品通知を行わないと判定する。あるいは、業務支援装置300は、欠品検知装置200から取得した直近の2以上の欠品検知情報のうち所定数以上が「欠品あり」を示す場合、端末400に対する欠品通知を行うと判定し、当該2以上の欠品検知情報のうち所定数以上が「欠品なし」を示す場合、端末400に対する欠品通知を行わないと判定する。なお、最新の欠品検知情報を優先し、それ以前の欠品検知情報を参酌して判定を行うようにしてもよい。 <<Judgment method 2 >>
When the majority of the two or more recent shortage detection information acquired from theshortage detection device 200 indicates "out of stock", the business support device 300 determines that the terminal 400 is notified of the shortage, and the second or more. When the majority of the above shortage detection information indicates "no shortage", it is determined that the terminal 400 is not notified of the shortage. Alternatively, the business support device 300 determines that the terminal 400 is notified of the shortage when a predetermined number or more of the two or more latest shortage detection information acquired from the shortage detection device 200 indicates "out of stock". Then, when a predetermined number or more of the two or more shortage detection information indicates "no shortage", it is determined that the terminal 400 is not notified of the shortage. It should be noted that the latest out-of-stock detection information may be prioritized, and the judgment may be made in consideration of the previous out-of-stock detection information.
業務支援装置300は、欠品検知装置200から取得した直近の2以上の欠品検知情報のうち過半数が「欠品あり」を示す場合、端末400に対する欠品通知を行うと判定し、当該2以上の欠品検知情報のうち過半数が「欠品なし」を示す場合、端末400に対する欠品通知を行わないと判定する。あるいは、業務支援装置300は、欠品検知装置200から取得した直近の2以上の欠品検知情報のうち所定数以上が「欠品あり」を示す場合、端末400に対する欠品通知を行うと判定し、当該2以上の欠品検知情報のうち所定数以上が「欠品なし」を示す場合、端末400に対する欠品通知を行わないと判定する。なお、最新の欠品検知情報を優先し、それ以前の欠品検知情報を参酌して判定を行うようにしてもよい。 <<
When the majority of the two or more recent shortage detection information acquired from the
欠品検知装置200によって生成される欠品検知情報が示す「欠品あり」又は「欠品なし」は、画像解析の性質上、誤っている場合もあり得る。そのため、上述した判定方法1及び2のように、複数の欠品検知情報に基づいて欠品通知を行うか否かを判定することにより、端末400に対する欠品通知の信頼性が向上する。
The "out of stock" or "no out of stock" indicated by the out of stock detection information generated by the out of stock detection device 200 may be incorrect due to the nature of image analysis. Therefore, as in the determination methods 1 and 2 described above, by determining whether or not to perform the shortage notification based on the plurality of shortage detection information, the reliability of the shortage notification to the terminal 400 is improved.
<マップUI>
図23は、端末400におけるマップUIの一例を示す図である。 <Map UI>
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a map UI in theterminal 400.
図23は、端末400におけるマップUIの一例を示す図である。 <Map UI>
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a map UI in the
端末400は、図23に示すように、店舗フロアにおける欠品棚の位置、及び、欠品棚における欠品区画の位置を示すマップUI2100を表示部405に表示する。マップUI2100は、フロアマップ画像2101、棚マップ画像2102、及び、欠品商品情報2103を含む。
As shown in FIG. 23, the terminal 400 displays the map UI 2100 indicating the position of the shortage shelf on the store floor and the position of the shortage section on the shortage shelf on the display unit 405. The map UI 2100 includes a floor map image 2101, a shelf map image 2102, and out-of-stock product information 2103.
フロアマップ画像2101は、店舗フロアにおける欠品棚の位置を示す。例えば、図23に示すように、フロアマップ画像2101は、店舗フロアにおける陳列棚の配置を示すと共に、欠品棚を他の陳列棚と異なる態様にて示す。欠品棚は、他の陳列棚と異なる色又はパターンでペイントされてよい。完全欠品の欠品棚は、部分欠品の欠品棚と異なる色又はパターンでペイントされてよい。例えば、図23に示すように、完全欠品の欠品棚は黒でペイントされ、部分欠品の欠品棚は斜線でペイントされる。
The floor map image 2101 shows the position of the shortage shelf on the store floor. For example, as shown in FIG. 23, the floor map image 2101 shows the arrangement of display shelves on the store floor and shows the shortage shelves in a manner different from other display shelves. Missing shelves may be painted in a different color or pattern than other display shelves. Completely out of stock shelves may be painted in a different color or pattern than partially out of stock shelves. For example, as shown in FIG. 23, the missing shelves that are completely out of stock are painted in black, and the out-of-stock shelves that are partially out of stock are painted in diagonal lines.
棚マップ画像2102は、欠品棚における欠品区画の位置を示す。例えば、図23に示すように、棚マップ画像2102は、欠品棚における欠品区画を他の区画と異なる態様にて示す。欠品区画は、他の区画と異なる色又はパターンでペイントされてよい。完全欠品の欠品区画は、部分欠品の欠品区画と異なる色又はパターンでペイントされてよい。例えば、図23に示すように、完全欠品の欠品区画は黒でペイントされ、部分欠品の欠品区画は斜線でペイントされる。
The shelf map image 2102 shows the position of the shortage section on the shortage shelf. For example, as shown in FIG. 23, the shelf map image 2102 shows the shortage section of the shortage shelf in a different manner from the other sections. The missing compartment may be painted in a different color or pattern than the other compartments. The complete shortage section may be painted in a different color or pattern than the partial missing section. For example, as shown in FIG. 23, the shortage section of the complete shortage is painted in black, and the shortage section of the partial shortage is painted in diagonal lines.
欠品商品情報2103は、欠品商品の商品カテゴリの名称2104と、欠品商品の欠品数2105とを示す。例えば、図23に示すように、欠品数2105では、完全欠品の欠品数2106Aと、部分欠品の欠品数2106Bとが別々に示される。
The out-of-stock product information 2103 indicates the name of the product category of the out-of-stock product 2104 and the number of out-of-stock products 2105. For example, as shown in FIG. 23, in the shortage number 2105, the shortage number 2106A of the complete shortage and the shortage number 2106B of the partial shortage are shown separately.
<通知一覧UI>
図24は、端末400における通知一覧UIの一例を示す図である。 <Notification list UI>
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of the notification list UI in theterminal 400.
図24は、端末400における通知一覧UIの一例を示す図である。 <Notification list UI>
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of the notification list UI in the
端末400は、図24に示すように、欠品通知の一覧を示す通知一覧UI2200を表示部405に表示する。通知一覧UI2200は、当日の通知数2201、絞り込み検索欄2202、通知設定ボタン2203、未入力タブ2204、入力済みタブ2205、通知オフタブ2206、及び、通知リスト2207を含む。
As shown in FIG. 24, the terminal 400 displays a notification list UI2200 showing a list of out-of-stock notifications on the display unit 405. The notification list UI 2200 includes the number of notifications 2201 of the day, the refined search field 2202, the notification setting button 2203, the non-input tab 2204, the input tab 2205, the notification off tab 2206, and the notification list 2207.
当日の通知数2201は、端末400が当日に受信した欠品通知の数を示す。
The number of notifications 2201 on the day indicates the number of out-of-stock notifications received by the terminal 400 on the day.
絞り込み検索欄2202には、通知リスト2207を絞り込むための検索条件が入力される。例えば、絞り込み検索欄2202には、通知リスト2207の項目に対応する、経過時間、棚番号又は商品カテゴリに関する検索条件が入力されてよい。
In the narrowing search field 2202, search conditions for narrowing down the notification list 2207 are input. For example, in the refined search field 2202, search conditions related to elapsed time, shelf numbers, or product categories corresponding to the items in the notification list 2207 may be input.
通知設定ボタン2203は、通知のオン又はオフを設定するためのボタンである。
Notification setting button 2203 is a button for setting notification on or off.
未入力タブ2204は、まだ何のアクションも行われていない欠品通知の通知リスト2207を表示する。未入力タブ2204のカッコ内の数字は、当該未入力タブ2204の通知リスト2207に含まれる欠品通知の数を示す。
The non-input tab 2204 displays the notification list 2207 of the shortage notification for which no action has been taken yet. The number in parentheses of the blank tab 2204 indicates the number of out-of-stock notifications included in the notification list 2207 of the blank tab 2204.
入力済みタブ2205は、すでに何らかのアクションが行われた欠品通知の通知リスト2207を表示する。入力済みタブ2205のカッコ内の数字は、当該入力済みタブ2205の通知リスト2207に含まれる欠品通知の数を示す。
The entered tab 2205 displays the notification list 2207 of the shortage notification for which some action has already been performed. The number in parentheses of the entered tab 2205 indicates the number of out-of-stock notifications included in the notification list 2207 of the entered tab 2205.
通知オフタブ2206は、通知オフ設定のために通知されなかった欠品通知の通知リスト2207を表示する。通知オフタブ2206のカッコ内の数字は、当該通知オフタブ2206の通知リスト2207に含まれる欠品通知の数を示す。
The notification off tab 2206 displays the notification list 2207 of the shortage notification that was not notified due to the notification off setting. The number in parentheses of the notification off-tab 2206 indicates the number of out-of-stock notifications included in the notification list 2207 of the notification off-tab 2206.
通知リスト2207は、欠品通知をリスト形式で表示する。通知リスト2207は、欠品通知に関する項目として、状態、経過時間、棚番号、商品カテゴリ、及び、位置を表示する。
・状態には、欠品通知を受信してからの経過時間に基づくアイコンが表示される。例えば、状態には、経過時間に応じて異なる色のアイコンが表示される。
・経過時間には、欠品通知を受信してからの経過時間が表示される。
・棚番号には、欠品棚の棚番号が表示される。なお、棚番号は、実施の形態1で説明した棚IDに相当する。
・商品カテゴリには、欠品商品の商品カテゴリの名称が表示される。あるいは、商品カテゴリには、商品名が表示されてもよい。
・位置には、欠品棚における欠品区画の位置が表示される。 Thenotification list 2207 displays the shortage notification in a list format. The notification list 2207 displays the status, elapsed time, shelf number, product category, and position as items related to the out-of-stock notification.
-In the status, an icon based on the elapsed time since receiving the out-of-stock notification is displayed. For example, the state displays icons of different colors depending on the elapsed time.
-The elapsed time displays the elapsed time since the out-of-stock notification was received.
-The shelf number of the out-of-stock shelf is displayed in the shelf number. The shelf number corresponds to the shelf ID described in the first embodiment.
-In the product category, the name of the product category of the out-of-stock product is displayed. Alternatively, the product name may be displayed in the product category.
-The position of the shortage section on the shortage shelf is displayed in the position.
・状態には、欠品通知を受信してからの経過時間に基づくアイコンが表示される。例えば、状態には、経過時間に応じて異なる色のアイコンが表示される。
・経過時間には、欠品通知を受信してからの経過時間が表示される。
・棚番号には、欠品棚の棚番号が表示される。なお、棚番号は、実施の形態1で説明した棚IDに相当する。
・商品カテゴリには、欠品商品の商品カテゴリの名称が表示される。あるいは、商品カテゴリには、商品名が表示されてもよい。
・位置には、欠品棚における欠品区画の位置が表示される。 The
-In the status, an icon based on the elapsed time since receiving the out-of-stock notification is displayed. For example, the state displays icons of different colors depending on the elapsed time.
-The elapsed time displays the elapsed time since the out-of-stock notification was received.
-The shelf number of the out-of-stock shelf is displayed in the shelf number. The shelf number corresponds to the shelf ID described in the first embodiment.
-In the product category, the name of the product category of the out-of-stock product is displayed. Alternatively, the product name may be displayed in the product category.
-The position of the shortage section on the shortage shelf is displayed in the position.
<通知詳細UI>
図25は、端末400における通知詳細UIの一例を示す図である。 <Notification details UI>
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of the notification detail UI in theterminal 400.
図25は、端末400における通知詳細UIの一例を示す図である。 <Notification details UI>
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of the notification detail UI in the
端末400は、通知一覧UI2200において1つの欠品通知が選択された場合、図25に示すように、当該選択された欠品通知の詳細を示す通知詳細UI2300を表示部405に表示する。通知詳細UI2300は、棚マップ画像2301、欠品通知詳細情報2302、アクション入力欄2303を含む。
When one out-of-stock notification is selected in the notification list UI 2200, the terminal 400 displays the notification detail UI 2300 showing the details of the selected out-of-stock notification on the display unit 405 as shown in FIG. 25. The notification detail UI 2300 includes a shelf map image 2301, a shortage notification detailed information 2302, and an action input field 2303.
棚マップ画像2301は、欠品棚における欠品区画の位置を示す。
The shelf map image 2301 shows the position of the shortage section on the shortage shelf.
欠品通知詳細情報2302は、欠品通知に関する詳細な情報を示す。欠品通知詳細情報2302は、例えば、色帯2311、棚番号2312、商品カテゴリ2313、位置2314、経過時間2315、最終検知時刻2316、通知設定2317を示す。
・色帯2311は、欠品通知が完全欠品又は部分欠品の何れであるかを異なる色で示す。
・棚番号2312は、欠品棚の棚番号を示す。
・商品カテゴリ2313は、欠品商品の商品カテゴリの名称を示す。あるいは、商品カテゴリ2313は、商品名を示してもよい。
・位置2314は、欠品棚における欠品区画の位置を示す。
・経過時間2315は、欠品通知を受信してからの経過時間を示す。
・最終検知時刻2316は、欠品を検知した最終時刻を示す。
・通知設定2317は、商品毎の通知のオン又はオフを設定するためのボタンである。 The shortage notificationdetailed information 2302 shows detailed information regarding the shortage notification. The shortage notification detailed information 2302 indicates, for example, a color band 2311, a shelf number 2312, a product category 2313, a position 2314, an elapsed time 2315, a final detection time 2316, and a notification setting 2317.
-Thecolor band 2311 indicates whether the shortage notification is a complete shortage or a partial shortage in different colors.
-Shelves number 2312 indicates the shelf number of the out-of-stock shelf.
-Product category 2313 indicates the name of the product category of the out-of-stock product. Alternatively, the product category 2313 may indicate a product name.
-Position 2314 indicates the position of the shortage section on the shortage shelf.
The elapsedtime 2315 indicates the elapsed time since the out-of-stock notification was received.
-Final detection time 2316 indicates the final time when a shortage is detected.
-Notification setting 2317 is a button for setting on or off of notification for each product.
・色帯2311は、欠品通知が完全欠品又は部分欠品の何れであるかを異なる色で示す。
・棚番号2312は、欠品棚の棚番号を示す。
・商品カテゴリ2313は、欠品商品の商品カテゴリの名称を示す。あるいは、商品カテゴリ2313は、商品名を示してもよい。
・位置2314は、欠品棚における欠品区画の位置を示す。
・経過時間2315は、欠品通知を受信してからの経過時間を示す。
・最終検知時刻2316は、欠品を検知した最終時刻を示す。
・通知設定2317は、商品毎の通知のオン又はオフを設定するためのボタンである。 The shortage notification
-The
-
-
-
The elapsed
-
-
アクション入力欄2303は、欠品通知に対するアクションの入力を受け付ける。例えば、アクション入力欄2303は、「補充する」の選択肢2321と、「補充しない」の選択肢2322とを有する。
・「補充する」の選択肢2321の中には、さらに、「現在対応中」及び「補充完了」のサブ選択肢が含まれてよい。担当者2は、欠品通知に対応する商品を補充する場合又は補充した場合、こちらの「補充する」の選択肢2321中のサブ選択肢の1つを選択してよい。
・「補充しない」の選択肢2322の中には、さらに、「在庫なし」、「忙しい」、「わざと空けている」、及び「お客様がいる」のサブ選択肢が含まれてよい。担当者2は、欠品通知に対応する商品を補充しない場合又は補充できない場合、こちらの「補充しない」の選択肢2322中のサブ選択肢の1つを選択してよい。 Theaction input field 2303 accepts the input of the action for the shortage notification. For example, the action input field 2303 has an option 2321 of "replenishment" and an option 2322 of "not replenishing".
-Theoption 2321 of "replenishment" may further include sub-options of "currently being dealt with" and "replenishment completed". The person in charge 2 may select one of the sub-options in the "replenishment" option 2321 here when replenishing or replenishing the product corresponding to the out-of-stock notification.
• The "not replenished"option 2322 may further include sub-options "out of stock", "busy", "intentionally vacant", and "with customer". The person in charge 2 may select one of the sub-options in the "do not replenish" option 2322 here when the product corresponding to the shortage notification is not replenished or cannot be replenished.
・「補充する」の選択肢2321の中には、さらに、「現在対応中」及び「補充完了」のサブ選択肢が含まれてよい。担当者2は、欠品通知に対応する商品を補充する場合又は補充した場合、こちらの「補充する」の選択肢2321中のサブ選択肢の1つを選択してよい。
・「補充しない」の選択肢2322の中には、さらに、「在庫なし」、「忙しい」、「わざと空けている」、及び「お客様がいる」のサブ選択肢が含まれてよい。担当者2は、欠品通知に対応する商品を補充しない場合又は補充できない場合、こちらの「補充しない」の選択肢2322中のサブ選択肢の1つを選択してよい。 The
-The
• The "not replenished"
担当者2は、欠品通知に対して、上記のアクション入力欄2303に含まれる選択肢の中から、適切な選択肢を選択し、決定ボタン2304を押下(タッチ)する。この場合、端末400は、担当者2が選択した選択肢の内容を、欠品通知に対する担当者2のアクションとして、業務支援装置300に送信する。これにより、業務支援装置300は、欠品通知に対する担当者2のアクションを管理できる。
In response to the shortage notification, the person in charge 2 selects an appropriate option from the options included in the above action input field 2303 and presses (touches) the enter button 2304. In this case, the terminal 400 transmits the content of the option selected by the person in charge 2 to the business support device 300 as an action of the person in charge 2 in response to the shortage notification. As a result, the business support device 300 can manage the action of the person in charge 2 in response to the shortage notification.
<陳列棚の変形例>
図26は、陳列棚の変形例を示す図である。 <Transformation example of display shelf>
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a modified example of the display shelf.
図26は、陳列棚の変形例を示す図である。 <Transformation example of display shelf>
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a modified example of the display shelf.
本開示の欠品検知システムは、商品を奥方向に並べるタイプの陳列棚10に限られず、図26に示すように、商品を平面に並べたり積み重ねたりするタイプの陳列棚10にも適用できる。この場合、陳列棚10を撮影するカメラ装置100は、図26に示すように、陳列棚10を上から撮影する位置に設置される。区画30は、図26に示すように、上から見た陳列棚10に対して設定される。
The shortage detection system of the present disclosure is not limited to the display shelf 10 of the type in which products are arranged in the back direction, but can also be applied to the display shelf 10 of the type in which products are arranged or stacked on a flat surface as shown in FIG. In this case, the camera device 100 for photographing the display shelf 10 is installed at a position where the display shelf 10 is photographed from above, as shown in FIG. 26. As shown in FIG. 26, the compartment 30 is set with respect to the display shelf 10 viewed from above.
(実施の形態3)
実施の形態3では、陳列棚10の撮影画像から棚割情報210を自動的に生成する例について説明する。なお、実施の形態3では、実施の形態1又は2で説明済みの内容については、同一の参照符号を付し、説明を省略する場合がある。また、以下の説明において、業務支援装置300を主体として記載される処理は、業務支援装置300の処理部301によって実行される処理であってよい。 (Embodiment 3)
In the third embodiment, an example of automatically generating theshelf allocation information 210 from the captured image of the display shelf 10 will be described. In the third embodiment, the same reference numerals may be given to the contents described in the first or second embodiment, and the description may be omitted. Further, in the following description, the process described mainly by the business support device 300 may be a process executed by the processing unit 301 of the business support device 300.
実施の形態3では、陳列棚10の撮影画像から棚割情報210を自動的に生成する例について説明する。なお、実施の形態3では、実施の形態1又は2で説明済みの内容については、同一の参照符号を付し、説明を省略する場合がある。また、以下の説明において、業務支援装置300を主体として記載される処理は、業務支援装置300の処理部301によって実行される処理であってよい。 (Embodiment 3)
In the third embodiment, an example of automatically generating the
図27は、陳列棚を撮影した画像から商品の外観画像を検出する処理の一例を説明するための図である。図28は、商品の外観画像の検出結果に基づいて棚割情報210を生成する処理の一例を説明するための図である。図29は、生成された棚割情報210の一例を示す図である。
FIG. 27 is a diagram for explaining an example of a process of detecting an external image of a product from an image of a display shelf. FIG. 28 is a diagram for explaining an example of a process of generating the shelf allocation information 210 based on the detection result of the appearance image of the product. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of the generated shelving allocation information 210.
業務支援装置300は、商品が欠品及び誤配置無く陳列されている陳列棚10を撮影した画像(以下「第1棚画像」という)3000に含まれる商品の外観画像と、当該外観画像が示す商品の商品名等の商品情報と、当該外観画像が示す商品の当該陳列棚10における配置の位置と、を対応付けて棚割情報210を生成し、メモリ302に記憶する。例えば、業務支援装置300は、次のステップS101~S102の処理によって、棚割情報210を生成する。
The business support device 300 shows an external image of the product included in an image (hereinafter referred to as “first shelf image”) 3000 of the display shelf 10 in which the product is displayed without missing or misplaced products, and the external image shows the external image. The shelf allocation information 210 is generated by associating the product information such as the product name of the product with the position of the arrangement of the product shown in the external image on the display shelf 10, and is stored in the memory 302. For example, the business support device 300 generates the shelf allocation information 210 by the processing of the next steps S101 to S102.
(ステップS101)業務支援装置300は、第1棚画像3000から各商品の外観画像を検出する。このとき、業務支援装置300は、図27に示すように、第1棚画像3000に対して、検出した各商品の外観画像を囲む枠3001を重畳した画像を、端末400の表示部405に表示してもよい。業務支援装置300は、図27に示すように、共通の商品の外観画像の枠3001を共通の態様(例えば同じ色又はパターン)で表示し、異なる商品の外観画像の枠3001を異なる態様(例えば異なる色又はパターン)で表示してもよい。図27では、外観画像の枠3001の異なる態様を、異なる線種で表現している。
(Step S101) The business support device 300 detects an external image of each product from the first shelf image 3000. At this time, as shown in FIG. 27, the business support device 300 displays an image in which the frame 3001 surrounding the detected appearance image of each product is superimposed on the first shelf image 3000 on the display unit 405 of the terminal 400. You may. As shown in FIG. 27, the business support device 300 displays the frame 3001 of the appearance image of a common product in a common mode (for example, the same color or pattern), and displays the frame 3001 of the appearance image of different products in a different mode (for example). It may be displayed in a different color or pattern). In FIG. 27, different aspects of the frame 3001 of the external image are represented by different line types.
(ステップS102)業務支援装置300は、ステップS101で検出した外観画像と、当該外観画像が示す商品の陳列棚10における陳列位置(例えば区画30)と、当該外観画像が示す商品の商品名とを対応付けて、メモリ302に記憶する。このとき、業務支援装置300は、図28に示すように、区画30内における同じ外観画像(つまり同じ商品)の列の数(以下「商品列数」という)を検出してもよい。業務支援装置300は、図28に示すように、第1棚画像3000に対して区画30の枠3002を重畳すると共に、区画30の枠3002内に当該区画30における商品列数3003を重畳した画像(以下「棚割画像」という)を、端末400の表示部405に表示してもよい。ここで、各区画30は、棚番号、棚段及び棚位置によって識別されるので、業務支援装置300は、図29に示すように、棚番号、棚段及び棚位置(つまり区画30)と、当該区画30にて検出された外観画像が示す商品の商品名との対応関係を、棚割情報210としてメモリ302に記憶してよい。業務支援装置300は、図28に示すように、異なる区画30の枠を異なる態様(例えば異なる色又はパターン)で表示してもよい。図28では、区画30の枠の異なる態様を、異なる線種で表現している。業務支援装置300は、図29に示すように、各商品の在庫数を棚割情報210に含めてもよい。
(Step S102) The business support device 300 has an external image detected in step S101, a display position (for example, a section 30) on the display shelf 10 of the product indicated by the external image, and a product name of the product indicated by the external image. It is stored in the memory 302 in association with each other. At this time, as shown in FIG. 28, the business support device 300 may detect the number of rows of the same appearance image (that is, the same product) in the section 30 (hereinafter referred to as “the number of product rows”). As shown in FIG. 28, the business support device 300 superimposes the frame 3002 of the section 30 on the first shelf image 3000, and superimposes the number of product rows 3003 in the section 30 on the frame 3002 of the section 30. (Hereinafter referred to as “shelf allocation image”) may be displayed on the display unit 405 of the terminal 400. Here, since each section 30 is identified by the shelf number, the shelf step, and the shelf position, the business support device 300 includes the shelf number, the shelf step, and the shelf position (that is, the section 30) as shown in FIG. 29. The correspondence relationship with the product name of the product indicated by the appearance image detected in the section 30 may be stored in the memory 302 as the shelf allocation information 210. As shown in FIG. 28, the business support device 300 may display the frames of different sections 30 in different modes (for example, different colors or patterns). In FIG. 28, different aspects of the frame of the section 30 are represented by different line types. As shown in FIG. 29, the business support device 300 may include the number of stocks of each product in the shelf allocation information 210.
業務支援装置300は、例えば、店舗の開店前に、上述した棚割情報210の生成を実施する。その際、業務支援装置300は、上述したとおり、図28に示すような、第1棚画像3000に対して各区画30の枠3002及び当該区画30内の商品列数3003を重畳した棚割画像を、店舗マネージャーの端末400に表示してもよい。これにより、店舗マネージャーは、端末400に表示された棚割画像から、店舗の開店前において、陳列棚10に正しく商品が陳列されているかどうかを効率的に確認できる。
The business support device 300, for example, generates the above-mentioned shelf allocation information 210 before the store opens. At that time, as described above, the business support device 300 superimposes the frame 3002 of each section 30 and the number of product rows 3003 in the section 30 on the first shelf image 3000 as shown in FIG. 28. May be displayed on the terminal 400 of the store manager. As a result, the store manager can efficiently confirm from the shelf allocation image displayed on the terminal 400 whether or not the products are correctly displayed on the display shelf 10 before the store opens.
図30は、欠品が検出された棚画像の表示例を示す図である。図31は、誤配置が検出された棚画像の表示例を示す図である。
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a display example of a shelf image in which a shortage is detected. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a display example of a shelf image in which misplacement is detected.
業務支援装置300は、第1棚画像3000よりも後に陳列棚10を撮影した画像(以下「第2棚画像」という)3100から、メモリ302に記憶された外観画像を検出し、その検出結果に基づいて、当該外観画像が示す商品の配置に関する通知(例えば欠品通知及び/又は誤配置通知)を制御する。ここで、誤配置は、商品が本来配置されるべき区画30とは異なる区画30に配置されることを意味する。例えば、業務支援装置300は、次のステップS201~S203の処理によって、商品の欠品及び誤配置を検出し、欠品通知及び誤配置通知を行う。なお、下記のステップS202とステップS203の実行の順序は入れ替えられてもよい。
The business support device 300 detects an external image stored in the memory 302 from an image (hereinafter referred to as “second shelf image”) 3100 obtained by taking a picture of the display shelf 10 after the first shelf image 3000, and uses the detection result as the result. Based on this, the notification regarding the placement of the product indicated by the appearance image (for example, the shortage notification and / or the misplacement notification) is controlled. Here, misplacement means that the goods are placed in a section 30 different from the section 30 in which the goods should be originally placed. For example, the business support device 300 detects a product shortage and misplacement by the processing of the next steps S201 to S203, and gives a shortage notification and a misplacement notification. The order of execution of steps S202 and S203 below may be interchanged.
(ステップS201)業務支援装置300は、第2棚画像3100から各商品の外観画像を検出する。
(Step S201) The business support device 300 detects an external image of each product from the second shelf image 3100.
(ステップS202)業務支援装置300は、第2棚画像3100において、メモリ302に記憶された外観画像が、当該外観画像が示す商品の配置の位置(例えば区画30)に存在しないことを検出した場合、当該外観画像が示す商品が欠品していると判定する。このとき、業務支援装置300は、図30に示すように、第2棚画像3100に対して、欠品として検出された部分を囲った枠(以下「欠品枠」という)3101を重畳した棚画像(以下「欠品棚画像」という)を、端末400の表示部405に表示してもよい。また、業務支援装置300は、商品が欠品していると判定した場合、実施の形態1又は2で説明したように、端末400に対して欠品通知を行ってよい。
(Step S202) When the business support device 300 detects in the second shelf image 3100 that the appearance image stored in the memory 302 does not exist at the position of the product arrangement (for example, the section 30) indicated by the appearance image. , It is determined that the product shown in the appearance image is out of stock. At this time, as shown in FIG. 30, the business support device 300 is a shelf in which a frame (hereinafter referred to as “out of stock frame”) 3101 surrounding a portion detected as a shortage is superimposed on the second shelf image 3100. An image (hereinafter referred to as "out of stock shelf image") may be displayed on the display unit 405 of the terminal 400. Further, when the business support device 300 determines that the product is out of stock, the business support device 300 may notify the terminal 400 of the shortage as described in the first or second embodiment.
(ステップS203)業務支援装置300は、第2棚画像3100において、メモリ302に記憶された外観画像が、当該外観画像が示す商品の配置の位置(例えば区画30)とは異なる位置(例えば異なる区画30)に存在することを検出した場合、当該外観画像に対応する商品が誤配置されていると判定する。このとき、業務支援装置300は、図31に示すように、第2棚画像3100に対して、誤配置として検出された外観画像を囲った枠(以下「誤配置枠」という)3102を重畳した棚画像(以下「誤配置棚画像」という)を、端末400の表示部405に表示してもよい。また、業務支援装置300は、商品が誤配置されていると判定した場合、実施の形態1又は2で説明した欠品通知と同様に、誤配置通知を行ってよい。
(Step S203) In the second shelf image 3100, the business support device 300 has a position (for example, a different section) in which the appearance image stored in the memory 302 is different from the position (for example, the section 30) of the product arrangement indicated by the appearance image. When it is detected that it exists in 30), it is determined that the product corresponding to the external appearance image is misplaced. At this time, as shown in FIG. 31, the business support device 300 superimposes a frame (hereinafter referred to as “misplaced frame”) 3102 surrounding the appearance image detected as misplacement on the second shelf image 3100. The shelf image (hereinafter referred to as “misplaced shelf image”) may be displayed on the display unit 405 of the terminal 400. Further, when the business support device 300 determines that the product is misplaced, the business support device 300 may give a misplacement notification in the same manner as the shortage notification described in the first or second embodiment.
以上の処理により、業務支援装置300は、欠品及び誤配置の位置を視覚的に確認できる欠品棚画像及び誤配置棚画像を生成及び表示できる。なお、業務支援装置300は、欠品枠3101及び誤配置枠3102を1つの第2棚画像3100に重畳してもよい。この場合、欠品枠3101は、誤配置枠3102と異なる態様(例えば異なる色)で表示されてよい。これにより、業務支援装置300は、欠品と誤配置の位置を視覚的に区別できる棚画像を表示できる。
By the above processing, the business support device 300 can generate and display a shortage shelf image and a misplaced shelf image that can visually confirm the positions of missing items and misplaced items. The business support device 300 may superimpose the shortage frame 3101 and the misplaced frame 3102 on one second shelf image 3100. In this case, the missing item frame 3101 may be displayed in a mode (for example, a different color) different from that of the misplaced frame 3102. As a result, the business support device 300 can display a shelf image that can visually distinguish between a missing item and a misplaced position.
業務支援装置300は、例えば、店舗の営業時間内に、上述した欠品通知を実施する。
これにより、店舗スタッフは、営業時間中において、端末400を通じて、欠品が生じた陳列棚10の区画30に素早く気付くことができ、欠品補充の作業を迅速に行うことができる。よって、店舗における販売機会の損失を低減できる。 Thebusiness support device 300, for example, carries out the above-mentioned shortage notification during the business hours of the store.
As a result, the store staff can quickly notice thesection 30 of the display shelf 10 where the shortage has occurred through the terminal 400 during the business hours, and can quickly perform the work of replenishing the shortage. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the loss of sales opportunities in the store.
これにより、店舗スタッフは、営業時間中において、端末400を通じて、欠品が生じた陳列棚10の区画30に素早く気付くことができ、欠品補充の作業を迅速に行うことができる。よって、店舗における販売機会の損失を低減できる。 The
As a result, the store staff can quickly notice the
業務支援装置300は、例えば、店舗の営業時間内に限らず、店舗の営業時間後にも、上述した誤配置通知を実施する。これにより、店舗スタッフは、営業時間後において、誤配置が存在する陳列棚10の区画30を素早く知ることができ、陳列棚10の整理にかかる時間を短縮できる。
The business support device 300, for example, implements the above-mentioned misplacement notification not only during the business hours of the store but also after the business hours of the store. As a result, the store staff can quickly know the section 30 of the display shelf 10 in which the misplacement exists after the business hours, and the time required for organizing the display shelf 10 can be shortened.
なお、上述した商品の外観画像の検出には、AI(Artificial Intelligence)技術が用いられてよい。例えば、業務支援装置300は、各商品の外観画像を予め学習した学習器を用いて、第1棚画像3000及び第2棚画像3100から各商品の外観画像を検出する。
Note that AI (Artificial Intelligence) technology may be used to detect the appearance image of the product described above. For example, the business support device 300 detects the appearance image of each product from the first shelf image 3000 and the second shelf image 3100 by using a learning device that has learned the appearance image of each product in advance.
また、上述した業務支援装置300の処理は、欠品検知装置200の処理に読み替えられてもよい。あるいは、上述した業務支援装置300の処理は、業務支援装置300及び欠品検知装置200の連携処理に読み替えられてもよい。
Further, the processing of the business support device 300 described above may be read as the processing of the shortage detection device 200. Alternatively, the above-mentioned processing of the business support device 300 may be read as a cooperative processing of the business support device 300 and the shortage detection device 200.
なお、上述した商品の外観画像は、商品のパッケージの外観画像に限られず、例えば野菜又は果物といったパッケージングされていない商品の外観画像であってもよい。また、本開示に係る陳列棚10の商品は、スーパーマーケットの商品に限られず、例えば、書店における書籍、工場における部品、又は、倉庫における段ボール等であってもよい。
The appearance image of the above-mentioned product is not limited to the appearance image of the package of the product, and may be the appearance image of the unpackaged product such as vegetables or fruits. Further, the product of the display shelf 10 according to the present disclosure is not limited to the product of the supermarket, and may be, for example, a book in a bookstore, a part in a factory, a corrugated cardboard in a warehouse, or the like.
また、業務支援装置300は、誤配置を検知した場合、端末400に誤配置通知を送信してよい。端末400は、誤配置通知を受信した場合、図22に示すような通知UI2000において、誤配置通知を示す通知画像2001を表示してもよい。加えて、端末400は、誤配置通知を受信した場合、図23に示すようなマップUI2100において、誤配置が検知された棚の位置を表示してもよい。なお、端末400は、図22又は図23に示すUIに代えて、図11又は図12に示すようなUIを表示してもよい。
Further, when the business support device 300 detects a misplacement, the business support device 300 may send a misplacement notification to the terminal 400. When the terminal 400 receives the misplacement notification, the terminal 400 may display the notification image 2001 indicating the misplacement notification in the notification UI 2000 as shown in FIG. 22. In addition, when the terminal 400 receives the misplacement notification, the terminal 400 may display the position of the shelf in which the misplacement is detected in the map UI 2100 as shown in FIG. 23. The terminal 400 may display the UI as shown in FIG. 11 or 12 instead of the UI shown in FIG. 22 or 23.
<実施の形態3のまとめ>
実施の形態3に係る業務支援装置(300)は、物品の陳列棚(10)を撮影した第1棚画像(3000)における少なくとも1つの物品の外観画像と、当該外観画像が示す物品の陳列棚における配置の位置とを対応付けて記憶する記憶部(302)と、第1棚画像よりも後に陳列棚を撮影した第2棚画像(3100)から、記憶部に記憶されている外観画像を検出し、その検出結果に基づいて、外観画像が示す物品の配置に関する通知を制御する処理部(301)と、を備える。この構成によれば、第1棚画像から検出した外観画像を用いて、第1棚画像よりも後に撮影した第2棚画像における物品の配置を検出し、当該検出結果に基づいて、物品の配置に関する通知を制御できるので、業務支援装置は、陳列棚に対する物品の正しい配置を示す棚割情報を手動で予め作成することなく、物品の配置に関する通知を制御できる。 <Summary ofEmbodiment 3>
The business support device (300) according to the third embodiment has an external image of at least one article in the first shelf image (3000) obtained by photographing the display shelf (10) of the article, and the display shelf of the article indicated by the external image. The appearance image stored in the storage unit is detected from the storage unit (302) that stores the arrangement position in association with each other and the second shelf image (3100) in which the display shelf is photographed after the first shelf image. Then, based on the detection result, the processing unit (301) for controlling the notification regarding the arrangement of the articles indicated by the external appearance image is provided. According to this configuration, the appearance image detected from the first shelf image is used to detect the arrangement of articles in the second shelf image taken after the first shelf image, and the arrangement of articles is detected based on the detection result. Since the notification regarding the placement of the goods can be controlled, the business support device can control the notification regarding the placement of the goods without manually creating the shelf allocation information indicating the correct placement of the goods on the display shelf in advance.
実施の形態3に係る業務支援装置(300)は、物品の陳列棚(10)を撮影した第1棚画像(3000)における少なくとも1つの物品の外観画像と、当該外観画像が示す物品の陳列棚における配置の位置とを対応付けて記憶する記憶部(302)と、第1棚画像よりも後に陳列棚を撮影した第2棚画像(3100)から、記憶部に記憶されている外観画像を検出し、その検出結果に基づいて、外観画像が示す物品の配置に関する通知を制御する処理部(301)と、を備える。この構成によれば、第1棚画像から検出した外観画像を用いて、第1棚画像よりも後に撮影した第2棚画像における物品の配置を検出し、当該検出結果に基づいて、物品の配置に関する通知を制御できるので、業務支援装置は、陳列棚に対する物品の正しい配置を示す棚割情報を手動で予め作成することなく、物品の配置に関する通知を制御できる。 <Summary of
The business support device (300) according to the third embodiment has an external image of at least one article in the first shelf image (3000) obtained by photographing the display shelf (10) of the article, and the display shelf of the article indicated by the external image. The appearance image stored in the storage unit is detected from the storage unit (302) that stores the arrangement position in association with each other and the second shelf image (3100) in which the display shelf is photographed after the first shelf image. Then, based on the detection result, the processing unit (301) for controlling the notification regarding the arrangement of the articles indicated by the external appearance image is provided. According to this configuration, the appearance image detected from the first shelf image is used to detect the arrangement of articles in the second shelf image taken after the first shelf image, and the arrangement of articles is detected based on the detection result. Since the notification regarding the placement of the goods can be controlled, the business support device can control the notification regarding the placement of the goods without manually creating the shelf allocation information indicating the correct placement of the goods on the display shelf in advance.
処理部(301)は、第2棚画像(3100)において、記憶部(302)に記憶された外観画像が、当該外観画像に対応付けられている配置の位置に存在しないことを検出した場合、当該外観画像が示す物品が欠品していることを通知してよい。当該通知は、外観画像が示す物品の識別情報と、検出した配置の位置(つまり欠品の位置)を示す情報とを含んでよい。これにより、業務支援装置は、陳列棚に対する物品の正しい配置を示す棚割情報を手動で予め作成することなく、例えば、端末に対して欠品通知を行うことができる。
When the processing unit (301) detects in the second shelf image (3100) that the appearance image stored in the storage unit (302) does not exist at the position of the arrangement associated with the appearance image, the processing unit (301) detects it. You may notify that the article shown in the external image is out of stock. The notification may include information indicating the identification information of the article shown in the external image and information indicating the position of the detected arrangement (that is, the position of the missing item). As a result, the business support device can, for example, notify the terminal of shortage without manually creating the shelf allocation information indicating the correct arrangement of the articles on the display shelf.
処理部(301)は、第2棚画像(3100)において、記憶部(302)に記憶された外観画像が、当該外観画像に対応付けられている配置の位置とは異なる位置に存在することを検出した場合、当該外観画像が示す物品が誤った位置に配置されていることを通知してよい。当該通知は、外観画像が示す物品の識別情報と、検出した異なる位置(つまり誤配置の位置)を示す情報とを含んでよい。これにより、業務支援装置は、陳列棚に対する物品の正しい配置を示す棚割情報を予め手動で作成することなく、例えば、端末に対して誤配置通知を行うことができる。
The processing unit (301) indicates that in the second shelf image (3100), the appearance image stored in the storage unit (302) exists at a position different from the position of the arrangement associated with the appearance image. If detected, it may notify that the article shown in the external image is placed in the wrong position. The notification may include identification information of the article indicated by the appearance image and information indicating a different detected position (that is, a position of misplacement). As a result, the business support device can, for example, notify the terminal of misplacement without manually creating shelf allocation information indicating the correct placement of the goods on the display shelf in advance.
(実施の形態4)
実施の形態4では、陳列棚10の欠品が検知された場合における、端末400へのアラートの通知方法について説明する。なお、実施の形態4では、実施の形態1から3にて説明済みの内容については、同一の参照符号を付し、説明を省略する場合がある。また、以下の説明において、業務支援装置300を主体として記載される処理は、業務支援装置300の処理部301によって実行される処理であってよい。 (Embodiment 4)
In the fourth embodiment, a method of notifying theterminal 400 of an alert when a shortage of the display shelf 10 is detected will be described. In the fourth embodiment, the same reference numerals may be given to the contents described in the first to third embodiments, and the description may be omitted. Further, in the following description, the process described mainly by the business support device 300 may be a process executed by the processing unit 301 of the business support device 300.
実施の形態4では、陳列棚10の欠品が検知された場合における、端末400へのアラートの通知方法について説明する。なお、実施の形態4では、実施の形態1から3にて説明済みの内容については、同一の参照符号を付し、説明を省略する場合がある。また、以下の説明において、業務支援装置300を主体として記載される処理は、業務支援装置300の処理部301によって実行される処理であってよい。 (Embodiment 4)
In the fourth embodiment, a method of notifying the
図32は、実施の形態4に係る業務支援装置300の構成例を示す図である。
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the business support device 300 according to the fourth embodiment.
業務支援装置300は、図32に示すように、図6に示す構成と同様の構成を有する。ただし、管理情報310は、図7に示す情報の少なくとも一部を含まなくてもよい。例えば、管理情報310は、図7に示す棚割アドバイス対処履歴情報を含まなくてもよい。業務支援装置300は、受信部303Bを通じて、例えば、店舗の在庫を管理している所定の在庫管理システムから在庫情報4002を受信し、ストレージ304に格納する。
As shown in FIG. 32, the business support device 300 has the same configuration as that shown in FIG. However, the management information 310 may not include at least a part of the information shown in FIG. 7. For example, the management information 310 may not include the shelf allocation advice handling history information shown in FIG. 7. The business support device 300 receives the inventory information 4002 from a predetermined inventory management system that manages the inventory of the store through the receiving unit 303B, and stores the inventory information 4002 in the storage 304, for example.
業務支援装置300は、欠品検知装置200から欠品検知情報を受信した場合、欠品が発生した陳列棚10の担当者2の端末400にアラート(情報)を通知(送信)する。このとき、業務支援装置300は、メモリ302内のアラートステータス4001に基づいて、アラートの通知タイミングを決定してよい。アラートステータス4001は、欠品商品のアラート通知を制御するために用いられる情報である。アラートの例として、欠品商品及び部分欠品の補充を促すアラート(以下「補充アラート」という)、部分欠品している商品の前陳を促すアラート(以下「前陳アラート」という)が挙げられる。以下、アラートの通知タイミングを決定する処理について詳細に説明する。
When the business support device 300 receives the shortage detection information from the shortage detection device 200, the business support device 300 notifies (transmits) an alert (information) to the terminal 400 of the person in charge 2 of the display shelf 10 in which the shortage has occurred. At this time, the business support device 300 may determine the alert notification timing based on the alert status 4001 in the memory 302. The alert status 4001 is information used to control the alert notification of the out-of-stock product. Examples of alerts include alerts that prompt the replenishment of missing items and partially missing items (hereinafter referred to as "replenishment alerts"), and alerts that prompt the advance display of partially missing items (hereinafter referred to as "advanced items alerts"). Will be. Hereinafter, the process of determining the alert notification timing will be described in detail.
図33は、実施の形態4に係るアラート判定処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。業務支援装置300は、陳列棚10に陳列され得る各商品について、当該アラート判定処理を実行する。
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the alert determination process according to the fourth embodiment. The business support device 300 executes the alert determination process for each product that can be displayed on the display shelf 10.
業務支援装置300は、商品のアラートステータス4001が「対象外」、「当日入荷待ち」又は「代替中」のうちの何れかに適合するか否かを判定する(S101)。ここで、アラートステータス4001「対象外」は、欠品商品(部分欠品商品でもよい)がアラート通知の対象外であることを示す。アラートステータス4001「当日入荷待ち」は、欠品商品が当日入荷されることを示す。アラートステータス4001「代替中」は、欠品商品の代替として他の商品が陳列中であることを示す。当該他の商品は、同じ陳列棚10に陳列される他の商品であることが好ましい。
The business support device 300 determines whether or not the alert status 4001 of the product conforms to any of "not applicable", "waiting for arrival on the day", or "under substitution" (S101). Here, the alert status 4001 "not applicable" indicates that the out-of-stock product (may be a partially out-of-stock product) is out of the target of the alert notification. Alert status 4001 "Waiting for arrival on the day" indicates that the out-of-stock item will be received on the same day. Alert status 4001 "Replacement" indicates that another product is being displayed as a substitute for the out-of-stock product. The other product is preferably another product displayed on the same display shelf 10.
商品のアラートステータス4001が「対象外」、「当日入荷待ち」又は「代替中」の何れかに適合する場合(S101:YES)、業務支援装置300は、当該商品のアラートステータス4001を変更することなく、本処理を終了する(END)。
When the alert status 4001 of the product conforms to either "not applicable", "waiting for arrival on the day" or "substitution" (S101: YES), the business support device 300 shall change the alert status 4001 of the product. This process is terminated (END).
アラートステータス4001が「対象外」、「当日入荷待ち」及び「代替え中」の何れにも適合しない場合(S101:NO)、業務支援装置300は、商品が欠品中であるか否かを判定する(S102)。例えば、業務支援装置300は、欠品検知装置200から欠品検知情報を受信した場合、欠品中であると判定し、欠品検知情報を受信しなかった場合、欠品中でないと判定する。
When the alert status 4001 does not correspond to any of "not applicable", "waiting for arrival on the day", and "substitution" (S101: NO), the business support device 300 determines whether or not the product is out of stock. (S102). For example, when the business support device 300 receives the shortage detection information from the shortage detection device 200, it determines that the product is out of stock, and when it does not receive the shortage detection information, it determines that the product is not out of stock. ..
業務支援装置300は、商品が欠品中でないと判定した場合(S102:NO)、未欠品対応処理を実行し(S400)、本処理を終了する(END)。なお、未欠品対応処理の詳細については後述する(図36参照)。
When the business support device 300 determines that the product is not out of stock (S102: NO), the business support device 300 executes a non-deficient product handling process (S400), and ends this process (END). The details of the processing for dealing with missing items will be described later (see FIG. 36).
業務支援装置300は、商品が欠品中であると判定した場合(S102:YES)、当該欠品商品は完全欠品であるか否かを判定する(S103)。
When the business support device 300 determines that the product is out of stock (S102: YES), the business support device 300 determines whether or not the out-of-stock product is completely out of stock (S103).
業務支援装置300は、欠品商品が完全欠品(補充が必要な欠品状態のことをいい、部分欠品状態を含む)である場合(S103:YES)、完全欠品対応処理を実行し(S200)、本処理を終了する(END)。なお、完全欠品対応処理の詳細については後述する(図34参照)。
When the out-of-stock product is completely out of stock (meaning a out-of-stock state that requires replenishment, including a partial out-of-stock state) (S103: YES), the business support device 300 executes a complete out-of-stock handling process. (S200), this process is terminated (END). The details of the complete shortage handling process will be described later (see FIG. 34).
業務支援装置300は、欠品商品が完全欠品でない場合(つまり部分欠品である場合、または補充が必要とは判断しない部分欠品の場合)(S103:NO)、部分欠品対応処理を実行し(S300)、本処理を終了する(END)。なお、部分欠品対応処理の詳細については後述する(図35参照)。
When the out-of-stock product is not completely out of stock (that is, when the out-of-stock product is partially out of stock, or when the out-of-stock product is not judged to require replenishment) (S103: NO), the business support device 300 performs a partial out-of-stock handling process. Execute (S300) and end this process (END). The details of the partial shortage handling process will be described later (see FIG. 35).
図34は、実施の形態4に係る完全欠品対応処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。
図34は、図33におけるS200の処理の詳細な説明に相当する。 FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the complete shortage handling process according to the fourth embodiment.
FIG. 34 corresponds to a detailed description of the process of S200 in FIG. 33.
図34は、図33におけるS200の処理の詳細な説明に相当する。 FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the complete shortage handling process according to the fourth embodiment.
FIG. 34 corresponds to a detailed description of the process of S200 in FIG. 33.
業務支援装置300は、在庫情報4002を参照し、欠品商品の在庫が存在するか否かを判定する(S201)。欠品商品の在庫が存在する場合(S201:YES)、業務支援装置300は、次のS202~S204の処理を実行する。
The business support device 300 refers to the inventory information 4002 and determines whether or not the inventory of the out-of-stock product exists (S201). When the inventory of the out-of-stock product exists (S201: YES), the business support device 300 executes the following processes S202 to S204.
業務支援装置300は、欠品商品に係るアラートリストを作成する(S202)。アラートリストは、担当者2の端末400に通知される複数のアラートをリスト化したものである。例えば、業務支援装置300は、共通のカテゴリに属する複数の欠品商品のアラートを、1つのリストにまとめてアラートリストを生成する。このとき、業務支援装置300は、当該複数のアラートを補充の優先度の高い順に並べてアラートリストを生成してよい。
The business support device 300 creates an alert list for out-of-stock products (S202). The alert list is a list of a plurality of alerts notified to the terminal 400 of the person in charge 2. For example, the business support device 300 collects alerts for a plurality of out-of-stock products belonging to a common category into one list to generate an alert list. At this time, the business support device 300 may generate an alert list by arranging the plurality of alerts in descending order of priority for replenishment.
業務支援装置300は、当該生成したアラートリストを含む、欠品商品の補充を促すアラート(補充アラート)を、欠品が検知された陳列棚10の担当者2の端末400に通知する(S203)。
The business support device 300 notifies the terminal 400 of the person in charge 2 of the display shelf 10 in which the shortage is detected, to notify the alert (replenishment alert) for replenishing the missing product, including the generated alert list (S203). ..
業務支援装置300は、当該欠品商品のアラートステータス4001を「アラート中」に変更し(S204)、本処理を終了する(RETURN)。なお、補充アラートが通知された担当者2は、当該補充アラートに含まれるアラートリストが示す順に、欠品商品を陳列棚10に補充してよい。
The business support device 300 changes the alert status 4001 of the out-of-stock product to "alert in progress" (S204), and ends this process (RETURN). The person in charge 2 who has been notified of the replenishment alert may replenish the shortage product to the display shelf 10 in the order indicated by the alert list included in the replenishment alert.
欠品商品の在庫が存在しない場合(S201:NO)、業務支援装置300は、欠品商品が当日入荷するか否かを判定する(S205)。例えば、業務支援装置300は、SCM(Supply Chain Management)関連システムによって特定された該当店舗への入荷商品及び入荷時刻を確認して、当該判定を行う。SCM関連システムの例として、発注システム、製造管理システム、運行管理システムが挙げられる。
When the out-of-stock product is not in stock (S201: NO), the business support device 300 determines whether or not the out-of-stock product arrives on the same day (S205). For example, the business support device 300 confirms the arrival product and the arrival time at the corresponding store specified by the SCM (Supply Chain Management) related system, and makes the determination. Examples of SCM-related systems include an ordering system, a manufacturing management system, and an operation management system.
欠品商品が当日入荷する場合(S205:YES)、業務支援装置300は、商品のアラートステータス4001を「当日入荷待ち」に変更し(S206)、本処理を終了する(RETURN)。
When the out-of-stock product arrives on the same day (S205: YES), the business support device 300 changes the alert status 4001 of the product to "waiting for arrival on the day" (S206), and ends this process (RETURN).
欠品商品が当日入荷しない場合(S205:NO)、業務支援装置300は、欠品商品が代替レイアウトの対象であるか否かを判定する(S207)。
When the out-of-stock product does not arrive on the day (S205: NO), the business support device 300 determines whether or not the out-of-stock product is the target of the alternative layout (S207).
欠品商品が代替レイアウトの対象でない場合(S207:NO)、業務支援装置300は、商品のアラートステータス4001を「対象外」に変更し(S208)、本処理を終了する(RETURN)。
If the missing product is not the target of the alternative layout (S207: NO), the business support device 300 changes the alert status 4001 of the product to "not applicable" (S208), and ends this process (RETURN).
欠品商品が代替レイアウトの対象である場合(S207:YES)、業務支援装置300は、次のS209~S211の処理を実行する。
When the out-of-stock product is the target of the alternative layout (S207: YES), the business support device 300 executes the following processes of S209 to S211.
業務支援装置300は、欠品商品の代替として他の商品を陳列する棚割レイアウトを示す代替レイアウトを生成する(S209)。
The business support device 300 generates an alternative layout showing a shelf allocation layout for displaying other products as a substitute for the out-of-stock product (S209).
業務支援装置300は、当該欠品商品が発生した陳列棚10を代替レイアウトが示す棚割に変更することを促すアラート(以下「レイアウト変更アラート」という)を、当該陳列棚10の担当者2の端末400に通知する(S210)。当該レイアウト変更アラートには、S209で生成した代替レイアウトが含まれる。
The business support device 300 issues an alert (hereinafter referred to as “layout change alert”) for urging the display shelf 10 in which the shortage product has occurred to be changed to the shelf allocation indicated by the alternative layout, by the person in charge 2 of the display shelf 10. Notify the terminal 400 (S210). The layout change alert includes an alternative layout generated in S209.
業務支援装置300は、当該商品のアラートステータス4001を「代替中」に変更し(S211)、本処理を終了する(RETURN)。なお、欠品商品の代替として陳列された商品の最初のアラートステータス4001は、「アラート中」とされてよい。なお、レイアウト変更アラートが通知された担当者2は、当該レイアウト変更アラートに含まれる代替レイアウトに基づいて、陳列棚10の商品を並び替えてよい。
The business support device 300 changes the alert status 4001 of the product to "substitute" (S211), and ends this process (RETURN). The first alert status 4001 of the product displayed as a substitute for the out-of-stock product may be set to "alert in progress". The person in charge 2 who has been notified of the layout change alert may sort the products on the display shelf 10 based on the alternative layout included in the layout change alert.
上記の処理によれば、業務支援装置300は、欠品商品の在庫が存在しない場合、補充アラートを端末400に通知しない。これにより、欠品商品の在庫が存在せず、補充が不可能な場合に補充アラートが通知されることを防止できる。また、業務支援装置300は、欠品商品の在庫が存在する場合、補充アラートを端末400に通知する。これにより、欠品商品の在庫が存在し、補充が可能な場合に補充アラートが通知されるので、担当者2は、補充アラートの通知を受けて、素早く欠品商品を補充できる。
According to the above processing, the business support device 300 does not notify the terminal 400 of the replenishment alert when the out-of-stock product is out of stock. As a result, it is possible to prevent a replenishment alert from being notified when the stock of the out-of-stock product does not exist and replenishment is not possible. Further, when the out-of-stock product is in stock, the business support device 300 notifies the terminal 400 of a replenishment alert. As a result, when the stock of the out-of-stock product is in stock and replenishment is possible, the replenishment alert is notified, so that the person in charge 2 can receive the notification of the replenishment alert and quickly replenish the out-of-stock product.
図35は、実施の形態4に係る部分欠品対応処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。
図35は、図33におけるS300の処理の詳細な説明に相当する。 FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the partial shortage handling process according to the fourth embodiment.
FIG. 35 corresponds to a detailed description of the process of S300 in FIG. 33.
図35は、図33におけるS300の処理の詳細な説明に相当する。 FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the partial shortage handling process according to the fourth embodiment.
FIG. 35 corresponds to a detailed description of the process of S300 in FIG. 33.
業務支援装置300は、部分欠品の商品に係るアラートリストを作成する(S301)。業務支援装置300は、部分欠品が解消されるように商品の配置を整理することを促すアラート(前陳アラート)を、部分欠品が検知された陳列棚10の担当者2の端末400に通知する(S302)。業務支援装置300は、部分欠品の商品のアラートステータス4001を「アラート中」に変更し(S303)、本処理を終了する(RETURN)。
The business support device 300 creates an alert list for products that are partially out of stock (S301). The business support device 300 sends an alert (previous alert) urging the arrangement of products so that the partial shortage is resolved to the terminal 400 of the person in charge 2 of the display shelf 10 in which the partial shortage is detected. Notify (S302). The business support device 300 changes the alert status 4001 of the partially out of stock product to "alert in progress" (S303), and ends this process (RETURN).
前陳アラートが通知された担当者2は、当該前陳アラートに含まれるアラートリストが示す順に、部分欠品の商品の配置を整理して部分欠品を解消してよい。例えば、担当者2は、棚に残っている部分欠品の商品を前方又は隣の空きスペースに移動させて、部分欠品を解消する。
The person in charge 2 who has been notified of the advance alert may arrange the arrangement of the partially missing products in the order indicated by the alert list included in the advance alert and eliminate the partial shortage. For example, the person in charge 2 moves the partially missing product remaining on the shelf to an empty space in front of or next to the shelf to eliminate the partially missing product.
図36は、実施の形態4に係る未欠品対応処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。図36は、図33におけるS400の処理の詳細な説明に相当する。
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the missing item handling process according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 36 corresponds to a detailed description of the process of S400 in FIG. 33.
業務支援装置300は、商品のアラートステータス4001が「アラート中」であるか否かを判定する(S401)。商品のアラートステータス4001が「アラート中」である場合(S401:YES)、業務支援装置300は、商品のアラートステータス4001を「完了」に変更し(S402)、本処理を終了する(RETURN)。商品のアラートステータス4001が「アラート中」でない場合(S401:NO)、業務支援装置300は、商品のアラートステータス4001を「正常」に変更し(S403)、本処理を終了する(RETURN)。
The business support device 300 determines whether or not the product alert status 4001 is "alert in progress" (S401). When the product alert status 4001 is "alert in progress" (S401: YES), the business support device 300 changes the product alert status 4001 to "completed" (S402) and ends this process (RETURN). When the product alert status 4001 is not "alert in progress" (S401: NO), the business support device 300 changes the product alert status 4001 to "normal" (S403) and ends this process (RETURN).
上記のS402の処理は、S102において欠品中でない(NO)と判定され、かつ、S401においてアラートステータス4001が「アラート中」である(YES)と判定された商品に対して実行される。すなわち、S402の処理は、欠品が発生してS204にてアラートステータス4001が「アラート中」に更新された商品であって(S401:YES)、その後、担当者2によって当該商品が補充され、S102において欠品が解消されたと判定(S102:NO)された商品に対して実行される。そのため、業務支援装置300は、S402において、商品のアラートステータス4001を、当該商品の補充が完了したことを示す「完了」に変更している。これにより、担当者2が欠品商品を補充すると、当該補充が自動的にアラートステータス4001に反映される。すなわち、担当者2が欠品商品を補充した後に当該補充を行ったことを業務支援装置300に入力しなくても、欠品の解消が自動的に業務支援装置300に反映される。
The above processing of S402 is executed for a product that is determined not to be out of stock (NO) in S102 and that the alert status 4001 is determined to be "alert in progress" (YES) in S401. That is, the process of S402 is a product in which a shortage occurs and the alert status 4001 is updated to "alert in progress" in S204 (S401: YES), and then the product is replenished by the person in charge 2. This is executed for the product determined in S102 that the shortage has been resolved (S102: NO). Therefore, in S402, the business support device 300 changes the alert status 4001 of the product to "completed" indicating that the replenishment of the product is completed. As a result, when the person in charge 2 replenishes the out-of-stock product, the replenishment is automatically reflected in the alert status 4001. That is, even if the person in charge 2 does not input to the business support device 300 that the replenishment has been performed after replenishing the missing product, the elimination of the shortage is automatically reflected in the business support device 300.
図37は、実施の形態4に係る入荷対応処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。業務支援装置300は、商品が入荷されたタイミングで、入荷された各商品について当該入荷対応処理を実行する。
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the arrival handling process according to the fourth embodiment. The business support device 300 executes the arrival handling process for each of the received products at the timing when the products are received.
業務支援装置300は、商品のアラートステータス4001が「入荷待ち」であるか否かを判定する(S501)。
The business support device 300 determines whether or not the alert status 4001 of the product is "waiting for arrival" (S501).
商品のアラートステータス4001が「入荷待ち」である場合(S501:YES)、業務支援装置300は、次のS502~S504の処理を実行する。
When the alert status 4001 of the product is "waiting for arrival" (S501: YES), the business support device 300 executes the following processes S502 to S504.
業務支援装置300は、アラートステータス4001が「入荷待ち」である商品に係るピッキングリストを作成する(S502)。以下、アラートステータス4001が「入荷待ち」である商品を、入荷待ち商品と称する。ピッキングリストでは、図34のS202で説明したように、ピッキング対象の商品が、共通のカテゴリにまとめられたり、優先度順に並べられたりしてよい。
The business support device 300 creates a picking list for products whose alert status 4001 is "waiting for arrival" (S502). Hereinafter, a product whose alert status 4001 is "waiting for arrival" will be referred to as a backordered product. In the picking list, as described in S202 of FIG. 34, the products to be picked may be grouped into a common category or arranged in order of priority.
業務支援装置300は、当該生成したピッキングリストを含む補充アラートを、入荷待ち商品の陳列棚10の担当者2の端末400に通知する(S503)。
The business support device 300 notifies the terminal 400 of the person in charge 2 of the display shelf 10 of the backordered product of the replenishment alert including the generated picking list (S503).
業務支援装置300は、入荷待ち商品のアラートステータス4001を「アラート中」に変更し(S504)、本処理を終了する(END)。
The business support device 300 changes the alert status 4001 of the backordered product to "alert in progress" (S504), and ends this process (END).
商品のアラートステータス4001が「入荷待ち」でない場合(S501:NO)、業務支援装置300は、当該商品のアラートステータス4001が「代替中」であるか否かを判定する(S505)。
When the alert status 4001 of the product is not "waiting for arrival" (S501: NO), the business support device 300 determines whether or not the alert status 4001 of the product is "substitute" (S505).
商品のアラートステータス4001が「代替中」でない場合(S505:NO)、業務支援装置300は、アラートステータス4001を変更することなく、本処理を終了する(END)。
When the alert status 4001 of the product is not "substitute" (S505: NO), the business support device 300 ends this process without changing the alert status 4001 (END).
商品のアラートステータス4001が「代替中」である場合(S505:YES)、業務支援装置300は、次のS506~S508の処理を実行する。以下、アラートステータス4001が「代替中」である送品を、代替中商品と称する。
When the alert status 4001 of the product is "substitute" (S505: YES), the business support device 300 executes the following processes S506 to S508. Hereinafter, a product whose alert status 4001 is "substitute" is referred to as a product being replaced.
業務支援装置300は、代替レイアウトに基づいて変更された棚割を元の棚割に復元するための代替復元レイアウトを生成する(S506)。
The business support device 300 generates an alternative restoration layout for restoring the changed shelf allocation based on the alternative layout to the original shelf allocation (S506).
業務支援装置300は、代替レイアウトに基づいて変更された棚割を元の棚割に復元することを促すレイアウト復元アラートを、当該復元対象の陳列棚10の担当者2の端末400に通知する(S507)。当該レイアウト復元アラートには、S506で生成した代替復元レイアウトが含まれる。なお、レイアウト復元アラートが通知された担当者2は、当該レイアウト復元アラートに含まれる代替復元レイアウトに基づいて、陳列棚10の商品を並び替えてよい。
The business support device 300 notifies the terminal 400 of the person in charge 2 of the display shelf 10 to be restored with a layout restoration alert prompting to restore the shelf allocation changed based on the alternative layout to the original shelf allocation (the terminal 400 of the person in charge 2 of the display shelf 10 to be restored). S507). The layout restore alert includes an alternative restore layout generated in S506. The person in charge 2 who has been notified of the layout restoration alert may sort the products on the display shelf 10 based on the alternative restoration layout included in the layout restoration alert.
業務支援装置300は、代替中商品のアラートステータス4001を「アラート中」に変更し(S508)、本処理を終了する(END)。
The business support device 300 changes the alert status 4001 of the product being replaced to "alert in progress" (S508), and ends this process (END).
上記の処理によれば、在庫に存在せず入荷待ちの欠品商品が入荷されたタイミングで、S503にてピッキングリストを含む補充アラートが通知される。よって、担当者2は、ピッキングリストに基づいて、入荷された欠品商品を、在庫に移動させることなく直接ピッキングして、欠品棚に補充することができる。これにより、欠品商品を補充する作業の効率が向上する。
According to the above processing, a replenishment alert including a picking list is notified in S503 at the timing when a missing item that does not exist in inventory and is backordered arrives. Therefore, the person in charge 2 can directly pick the received shortage product based on the picking list without moving it to the inventory and replenish it to the shortage shelf. This improves the efficiency of the work of replenishing the missing products.
<補足及び変形例>
上述した担当者2は、予め定められた商品カテゴリの陳列棚10を担当する者であってよい。店舗がスーパーマーケットの場合、商品カテゴリの例として、野菜カテゴリ、肉カテゴリ、飲料カテゴリ、冷凍食品カテゴリ、雑貨カテゴリ等が挙げられる。商品カテゴリは、商品エリアと読み替えられてもよい。 <Supplementary and modified examples>
The person incharge 2 described above may be a person in charge of the display shelf 10 of a predetermined product category. When the store is a supermarket, examples of product categories include a vegetable category, a meat category, a beverage category, a frozen food category, and a miscellaneous goods category. The product category may be read as the product area.
上述した担当者2は、予め定められた商品カテゴリの陳列棚10を担当する者であってよい。店舗がスーパーマーケットの場合、商品カテゴリの例として、野菜カテゴリ、肉カテゴリ、飲料カテゴリ、冷凍食品カテゴリ、雑貨カテゴリ等が挙げられる。商品カテゴリは、商品エリアと読み替えられてもよい。 <Supplementary and modified examples>
The person in
上述した商品の在庫の有無の判定は、商品の論理在庫数に基づいて判定されてもよい。商品の論理在庫数は、「論理在庫数=前日棚卸数+入荷数-販売数+調整値」として算出されてよい。入荷数は、入荷時刻も考慮されてよい。例えば、開店時刻後に入荷される商品の論理在庫数を算出する場合、上記の算出式の入荷数には、開店時刻後の入荷数が代入されてよい。調整値は、商品の特性に応じて定められてよい。調整値は、0、正値、及び、負値の何れであってもよい。例えば、特設コーナーに特別に陳列される商品の調整値は、負値であってよい。店内回遊中に多数の客が手に取る商品の調整値は、負値であってよい。長期保存可能で棚卸数以上に在庫がある商品の調整値は、正値であってよい。
The above-mentioned determination of whether or not the product is in stock may be determined based on the logical inventory quantity of the product. The logical inventory quantity of the product may be calculated as "logical inventory quantity = previous day inventory quantity + arrival quantity-sales quantity + adjustment value". The number of arrivals may also take into account the arrival time. For example, when calculating the logical inventory quantity of products to be received after the opening time, the arrival quantity after the opening time may be substituted into the arrival quantity of the above calculation formula. The adjustment value may be determined according to the characteristics of the product. The adjustment value may be 0, a positive value, or a negative value. For example, the adjustment value of the goods specially displayed in the special corner may be a negative value. The adjustment value of the product picked up by a large number of customers during the in-store migration may be a negative value. The adjustment value of the product that can be stored for a long time and is in stock more than the number of inventories may be a positive value.
アラートは、陳列棚10の単位でまとめてリスト化されて通知されてよい。また、アラートが複数存在する場合、後述の実施の形態5に示す需要変数fの高い商品のアラートが優先されてよい。例えば、業務支援装置300は、優先度の高い順に上から並べたアラートのリストを、端末400に通知してよい。従業員は、端末400に通知されたリストを見て、リストの上のアラートから順に対応してよい。
Alerts may be collectively listed and notified in units of display shelves 10. Further, when a plurality of alerts exist, the alert of the product having a high demand variable f shown in the fifth embodiment described later may be prioritized. For example, the business support device 300 may notify the terminal 400 of a list of alerts arranged in descending order of priority. The employee may look at the list notified to the terminal 400 and respond in order from the alert on the list.
アラートの対象である陳列棚10が複数存在する場合、業務支援装置300は、陳列棚10に陳列されている各商品の需要変数fの合計の大きさに応じて、陳列棚10に対する作業の優先度を決定してよい。上記の対応作業の優先度を示すアラートのリストは、陳列棚10の単位で生成されてよい。この場合、少なくとも2つの陳列棚10をまたがる優先度付けは、行われなくてよい。
When there are a plurality of display shelves 10 to be alerted, the business support device 300 gives priority to the work on the display shelves 10 according to the total size of the demand variables f of each product displayed on the display shelves 10. You may decide the degree. The list of alerts indicating the priority of the above response work may be generated in units of display shelves 10. In this case, prioritization across at least two display shelves 10 does not have to be performed.
<実施の形態4のまとめ>
実施の形態4に係る業務支援装置(300)は、欠品または部分欠品が検知された棚及び物品を示す欠品検知情報、及び、物品の在庫状況を示す在庫情報(4002)を受信する受信部(303B)と、在庫情報(4002)に示される欠品が検知された物品の在庫状況に基づいて、欠品検知情報に示される欠品または部分欠品が検知された物品の棚(10)への補充を促す情報(補充アラート)の送信(通知)タイミングを制御する処理部(301)とを備える。これにより、欠品が検知された物品の在庫状況に応じて、当該物品の補充アラートの通知タイミングを制御できる。 <Summary ofEmbodiment 4>
The business support device (300) according to the fourth embodiment receives shortage detection information indicating a shelf and an article in which a missing item or a partial missing item is detected, and inventory information (4002) indicating an inventory status of the article. Based on the inventory status of the receiving unit (303B) and the article in which the shortage is detected shown in the inventory information (4002), the shelf of the article in which the missing item or the partial missing item shown in the missing item detection information is detected ( A processing unit (301) that controls the transmission (notification) timing of information (replenishment alert) prompting replenishment to 10) is provided. As a result, it is possible to control the notification timing of the replenishment alert of the article according to the inventory status of the article in which the shortage is detected.
実施の形態4に係る業務支援装置(300)は、欠品または部分欠品が検知された棚及び物品を示す欠品検知情報、及び、物品の在庫状況を示す在庫情報(4002)を受信する受信部(303B)と、在庫情報(4002)に示される欠品が検知された物品の在庫状況に基づいて、欠品検知情報に示される欠品または部分欠品が検知された物品の棚(10)への補充を促す情報(補充アラート)の送信(通知)タイミングを制御する処理部(301)とを備える。これにより、欠品が検知された物品の在庫状況に応じて、当該物品の補充アラートの通知タイミングを制御できる。 <Summary of
The business support device (300) according to the fourth embodiment receives shortage detection information indicating a shelf and an article in which a missing item or a partial missing item is detected, and inventory information (4002) indicating an inventory status of the article. Based on the inventory status of the receiving unit (303B) and the article in which the shortage is detected shown in the inventory information (4002), the shelf of the article in which the missing item or the partial missing item shown in the missing item detection information is detected ( A processing unit (301) that controls the transmission (notification) timing of information (replenishment alert) prompting replenishment to 10) is provided. As a result, it is possible to control the notification timing of the replenishment alert of the article according to the inventory status of the article in which the shortage is detected.
また、処理部(301)は、欠品または部分欠品が検知された物品の在庫が存在しない場合、補充アラートを通知しなくてよい。これにより、欠品商品の在庫が存在せず、補充が不可能な場合に補充アラートが通知されることを防止でき、担当者2の欠品対応業務の効率が向上する。
Further, the processing unit (301) does not have to notify the replenishment alert when there is no stock of the article in which the shortage or the partial shortage is detected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the replenishment alert from being notified when the out-of-stock product is out of stock and replenishment is not possible, and the efficiency of the out-of-stock handling work of the person in charge 2 is improved.
また、処理部(301)は、欠品または部分欠品が検知された物品の在庫が存在する場合、補充アラートを通知してよい。これにより、欠品商品の在庫が存在し、補充が可能な場合に補充アラートが通知されるので、担当者2の欠品対応業務の効率が向上する。
Further, the processing unit (301) may notify a replenishment alert when there is an inventory of an article for which a shortage or a partial shortage has been detected. As a result, a replenishment alert is notified when the out-of-stock product is in stock and can be replenished, so that the efficiency of the out-of-stock handling work of the person in charge 2 is improved.
また、処理部(301)は、欠品または部分欠品が検知された物品が棚(10)に存在せず、かつ、欠品または部分欠品が検知された物品の在庫が存在する場合、補充アラートを通知してよい。これにより、棚10において欠品または部分欠品の商品の在庫が存在し、補充が可能な場合に補充アラートが通知されるので、担当者2の欠品対応業務の効率が向上する。
Further, when the processing unit (301) does not have an article in which a missing item or a partial missing item is detected on the shelf (10) and an item in which a missing item or a partial missing item is detected is present, the processing unit (301) has an inventory. You may be notified of replenishment alerts. As a result, when a product that is out of stock or partially out of stock exists on the shelf 10 and can be replenished, a replenishment alert is notified, so that the efficiency of the out-of-stock handling work of the person in charge 2 is improved.
また、処理部(301)は、欠品または部分欠品が検知された物品の少なくとも一部が棚(10)に存在する場合、棚(10)に存在する物品の整理を促す情報(前陳アラート)を通知(送信)してよい。これにより、棚10において欠品又は部分欠品が発生した場合に前陳アラートが通知されるので、担当者2は、素早く部分欠品を解消することができる。
Further, when at least a part of the articles in which the missing item or the partial missing item is detected is present on the shelf (10), the processing unit (301) prompts the organization of the articles existing on the shelf (10) (previous display). Alerts) may be notified (sent). As a result, when a shortage or a partial shortage occurs on the shelf 10, an advance alert is notified, so that the person in charge 2 can quickly resolve the partial shortage.
また、処理部(301)は、欠品または部分欠品が検知された物品の在庫が存在せず、かつ、棚(10)に存在する他の物品の在庫が存在する場合、他の物品を当該物品の代わりに補充することを促す情報(レイアウト変更アラート)を送信(通知)してよい。これにより、棚10において欠品または部分欠品が検知された物品の在庫が存在せず、かつ、棚10に存在する他の物品の在庫が存在する場合にレイアウト変更アラートが通知されるので、担当者2は、他の物品を欠品した物品の代わりに補充することができる。
Further, when the processing unit (301) does not have the inventory of the article for which the shortage or the partial shortage is detected and the inventory of the other article existing on the shelf (10) exists, the processing unit (301) puts the other article. Information (layout change alert) urging replenishment may be sent (notified) on behalf of the article. As a result, the layout change alert is notified when there is no inventory of the article for which the shortage or partial shortage is detected on the shelf 10 and the inventory of other articles existing on the shelf 10 is present. The person in charge 2 can replenish other articles in place of the missing articles.
(実施の形態5)
実施の形態5では、棚割レイアウト5003を自動的に作成する方法について説明する。なお、実施の形態5では、実施の形態1から4にて説明済みの内容については、同一の参照符号を付し、説明を省略する場合がある。また、以下の説明において、業務支援装置300を主体として記載される処理は、業務支援装置300の処理部301によって実行される処理であってよい。 (Embodiment 5)
In the fifth embodiment, a method of automatically creating theshelf layout layout 5003 will be described. In the fifth embodiment, the same reference numerals may be given to the contents described in the first to fourth embodiments, and the description may be omitted. Further, in the following description, the process described mainly by the business support device 300 may be a process executed by the processing unit 301 of the business support device 300.
実施の形態5では、棚割レイアウト5003を自動的に作成する方法について説明する。なお、実施の形態5では、実施の形態1から4にて説明済みの内容については、同一の参照符号を付し、説明を省略する場合がある。また、以下の説明において、業務支援装置300を主体として記載される処理は、業務支援装置300の処理部301によって実行される処理であってよい。 (Embodiment 5)
In the fifth embodiment, a method of automatically creating the
図38は、実施の形態5に係る業務支援装置300の構成例を示す図である。
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the business support device 300 according to the fifth embodiment.
業務支援装置300は、図38に示すように、図6に示す構成と同様の構成を有する。ただし、管理情報310は、図7に示す情報の少なくとも一部を含まなくてもよい。例えば、管理情報310は、図7に示す棚割アドバイス対処履歴情報を含まなくてもよい。
As shown in FIG. 38, the business support device 300 has the same configuration as that shown in FIG. However, the management information 310 may not include at least a part of the information shown in FIG. 7. For example, the management information 310 may not include the shelf allocation advice handling history information shown in FIG. 7.
業務支援装置300は、POSシステムから得られる各商品の販売履歴情報5001、及び、管理情報310に含まれる欠品履歴情報5002に基づいて、利益の向上が見込まれる棚割レイアウト5003を自動的に生成する。欠品履歴情報5002は、過去の欠品検知結果に基づいて生成されてよい。以下、棚割レイアウト5003を自動的に生成する処理について詳細に説明する。
The business support device 300 automatically creates a shelf allocation layout 5003 that is expected to improve profits based on the sales history information 5001 of each product obtained from the POS system and the shortage history information 5002 included in the management information 310. Generate. The shortage history information 5002 may be generated based on the past shortage detection result. Hereinafter, the process of automatically generating the shelf layout layout 5003 will be described in detail.
図39は、実施の形態5に係る棚割レイアウト生成処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the shelf allocation layout generation process according to the fifth embodiment.
業務支援装置300は、エリアの各陳列棚10に陳列すべき各商品の需要変数fを算出する(S601)。需要変数fは、商品の需要の大きさを示す値であり、店舗及び商品毎に異なり得る。需要変数fの算出方法については後述する。
The business support device 300 calculates the demand variable f of each product to be displayed on each display shelf 10 in the area (S601). The demand variable f is a value indicating the magnitude of the demand for the product, and may differ for each store and product. The calculation method of the demand variable f will be described later.
業務支援装置300は、エリアの各陳列棚10に陳列すべき各商品の在庫変数gを算出する(S602)。在庫変数gは、商品を在庫として保持可能な量を示す値であり、店舗及び商品毎に異なり得る。在庫変数gの算出方法については後述する。
The business support device 300 calculates the inventory variable g of each product to be displayed on each display shelf 10 in the area (S602). The inventory variable g is a value indicating an amount that can hold the product as inventory, and may differ depending on the store and the product. The method of calculating the inventory variable g will be described later.
業務支援装置300は、エリアの各陳列棚10に陳列すべき各商品の販売ポイントCを算出する(S603)。販売ポイントCは、商品自体の販売能力の高さを示す値であり、商品毎に異なり得る。販売ポイントCの算出方法の詳細については後述する。
The business support device 300 calculates the sales point C of each product to be displayed on each display shelf 10 in the area (S603). The selling point C is a value indicating the high selling ability of the product itself, and may differ for each product. The details of the calculation method of the sales point C will be described later.
業務支援装置300は、エリアの各陳列棚10及び各棚段の位置ポイントDを算出する(S604)。位置ポイントDは、各陳列棚10及び各棚段の陳列位置の販売能力の高さを示す値であり、陳列棚10毎及び棚段毎に異なり得る。位置ポイントDの算出方法の詳細については後述する。
The business support device 300 calculates the position point D of each display shelf 10 and each shelf stage in the area (S604). The position point D is a value indicating the high selling capacity of each display shelf 10 and the display position of each shelf, and may be different for each display shelf 10 and each shelf. The details of the calculation method of the position point D will be described later.
業務支援装置300は、各商品の販売ポイントCと、商品が陳列される各陳列棚10及び各棚段の位置ポイントDとに基づいて、エリアの各陳列棚10の棚割レイアウト5003を生成する(S605)。なお、棚割レイアウト5003の生成方法の詳細については後述する。
The business support device 300 generates a shelf allocation layout 5003 for each display shelf 10 in the area based on the sales point C of each product and the position point D of each display shelf 10 on which the product is displayed and each shelf stage. (S605). The details of the method of generating the shelf layout layout 5003 will be described later.
業務支援装置300は、生成した棚割レイアウト5003を表示する(S606)。担当者2は、表示された棚割レイアウト5003を、必要に応じて修正する(S607)。
The business support device 300 displays the generated shelf layout layout 5003 (S606). The person in charge 2 modifies the displayed shelf layout layout 5003 as necessary (S607).
業務支援装置300は、棚割レイアウト5003を、実際のエリアの陳列棚10に反映する(S608)。例えば、業務支援装置300は、棚割レイアウト5003に基づいて、陳列棚10のビデオレールにおける電子棚札の内容を書き換える。
The business support device 300 reflects the shelf layout layout 5003 on the display shelf 10 in the actual area (S608). For example, the business support device 300 rewrites the contents of the electronic shelf label on the video rail of the display shelf 10 based on the shelf allocation layout 5003.
担当者2は、棚割レイアウト5003が反映されたエリアの陳列棚10に、その棚割レイアウト5003に合わせて商品を陳列する(S609)。例えば、担当者2は、書き換えられた電子棚札の位置に合わせて、当該電子棚札が示す商品を陳列する。
The person in charge 2 displays the products on the display shelf 10 in the area where the shelf layout layout 5003 is reflected according to the shelf layout layout 5003 (S609). For example, the person in charge 2 displays the product indicated by the electronic shelf label according to the position of the rewritten electronic shelf label.
<需要変数の算出方法>
図40は、実施の形態5に係る需要変数fの算出方法の一例を説明するための図である。 <Calculation method of demand variables>
FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining an example of a method of calculating the demand variable f according to the fifth embodiment.
図40は、実施の形態5に係る需要変数fの算出方法の一例を説明するための図である。 <Calculation method of demand variables>
FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining an example of a method of calculating the demand variable f according to the fifth embodiment.
図40に示すように、業務支援装置300は、商品の販売実績xを横軸とし、商品の欠品実績yを縦軸とするマップを、販売実績xを所定の閾値T1で区分し、欠品実績yを所定の閾値T2で区分することにより、4つのセグメントに分割する。
As shown in FIG. 40, the business support device 300 divides a map having the product sales record x on the horizontal axis and the product shortage record y on the vertical axis, and divides the sales record x by a predetermined threshold value T1 and lacks. By classifying the product performance y by a predetermined threshold value T2, it is divided into four segments.
商品の販売実績xは、販売履歴情報5001から得られてよい。販売実績xは、所定期間(例えば1週間)における商品の販売総数であってよい。あるいは、販売実績xは、商品の平均的な販売総数を基準とした偏差値であってもよい。
The sales record x of the product may be obtained from the sales history information 5001. The sales record x may be the total number of products sold in a predetermined period (for example, one week). Alternatively, the sales record x may be a deviation value based on the average total number of sales of the products.
商品の欠品実績yは、欠品履歴情報5002から得られてよい。欠品実績yは、所定期間(例えば1週間)における商品の欠品発生回数(つまり欠品発生頻度)であってよい。
The product shortage record y may be obtained from the shortage history information 5002. The out-of-stock record y may be the number of out-of-stock occurrences (that is, the out-of-stock occurrence frequency) of the product in a predetermined period (for example, one week).
閾値T1は、ユーザによって任意に定められてもよいし、所定期間における商品の平均的な販売総数に応じて定められてもよい。閾値T2は、ユーザによって任意に定められてもよいし、所定期間における商品の平均的な欠品発生回数に応じて定められてもよい。
The threshold value T1 may be arbitrarily set by the user, or may be set according to the average total number of products sold in a predetermined period. The threshold value T2 may be arbitrarily set by the user, or may be set according to the average number of product shortages in a predetermined period.
以下、販売実績xが閾値T1以上かつ欠品実績yが閾値T2以上のセグメントを第1セグメントと称する。販売実績xが閾値T1未満かつ欠品実績yが閾値T2以上のセグメントを第2セグメントと称する。販売実績xが閾値T1以上かつ欠品実績yが閾値T2未満のセグメントを第3セグメントと称する。販売実績xが閾値T1未満かつ欠品実績yが閾値T2未満のセグメントを第4セグメントと称する。
Hereinafter, a segment in which the sales record x is the threshold value T1 or more and the shortage record y is the threshold value T2 or more is referred to as a first segment. A segment in which the sales record x is less than the threshold value T1 and the shortage record y is the threshold value T2 or more is referred to as a second segment. A segment in which the sales record x is equal to or higher than the threshold value T1 and the shortage record y is less than the threshold value T2 is referred to as a third segment. A segment in which the sales record x is less than the threshold value T1 and the shortage record y is less than the threshold value T2 is referred to as a fourth segment.
ただし、マップの分割数及び分割方法は、上記の例に限られない。例えば、業務支援装置300は、販売実績x及び欠品実績yのうちの少なくとも一方の閾値の数を増やし、マップを4つよりも多いセグメントに分割してもよい。あるいは、業務支援装置300は、販売実績xの増加に伴い欠品実績yも増加するような閾値の直線、及び、販売実績xの増加に伴い欠品実績yが減少するような閾値の直線を設定し、それらの閾値の直線によって、マップを複数のセグメントに分割してもよい。この場合、分割されたセグメントの形状は、長方形とは異なる形状になり得る。
However, the number of map divisions and the division method are not limited to the above example. For example, the business support device 300 may increase the number of threshold values of at least one of the sales record x and the shortage record y, and divide the map into more than four segments. Alternatively, the business support device 300 has a threshold straight line such that the shortage record y increases as the sales record x increases, and a threshold straight line such that the shortage record y decreases as the sales record x increases. You may set and divide the map into multiple segments by the straight lines of those thresholds. In this case, the shape of the divided segment can be different from the shape of the rectangle.
商品は、当該商品の販売実績x及び欠品実績yに基づいて、第1セグメントから第4セグメントのうちの何れかにプロットされる。商品の需要変数fは、次の式1によって算出されてよい。
f=α×x …(式1)
ここで、αは欠品係数を示し、商品がプロットされるセグメントによって定まる値であってよい。 The product is plotted in any of the first segment to the fourth segment based on the sales record x and the shortage record y of the product. The demand variable f of the product may be calculated by thefollowing equation 1.
f = α × x ... (Equation 1)
Here, α indicates a shortage coefficient, and may be a value determined by the segment in which the product is plotted.
f=α×x …(式1)
ここで、αは欠品係数を示し、商品がプロットされるセグメントによって定まる値であってよい。 The product is plotted in any of the first segment to the fourth segment based on the sales record x and the shortage record y of the product. The demand variable f of the product may be calculated by the
f = α × x ... (Equation 1)
Here, α indicates a shortage coefficient, and may be a value determined by the segment in which the product is plotted.
第1セグメントの欠品係数α1、第2セグメントの欠品係数α2、第3セグメントの欠品係数α3、第4セグメントの欠品係数α4は、次のような関係を有してよい。
α1≧α2>α3≧α4>0 The shortage coefficient α 1 of the first segment, the shortage coefficient α 2 of the second segment, the shortage coefficient α 3 of the third segment, and the shortage coefficient α 4 of the fourth segment have the following relationships. good.
α 1 ≧ α 2 > α 3 ≧ α 4 > 0
α1≧α2>α3≧α4>0 The shortage coefficient α 1 of the first segment, the shortage coefficient α 2 of the second segment, the shortage coefficient α 3 of the third segment, and the shortage coefficient α 4 of the fourth segment have the following relationships. good.
α 1 ≧ α 2 > α 3 ≧ α 4 > 0
また、α1、α2を1よりも大きい値に定め、α3、α4を1以下の値に定めてよい。
その理由は以下の通りである。 Further, α 1 and α 2 may be set to a value larger than 1, and α 3 and α 4 may be set to a value of 1 or less.
The reason is as follows.
その理由は以下の通りである。 Further, α 1 and α 2 may be set to a value larger than 1, and α 3 and α 4 may be set to a value of 1 or less.
The reason is as follows.
第1セグメントにプロットされた商品は、販売実績xも大きく、欠品実績yも大きいので、欠品を減らすことにより、さらに販売数が増える可能性が高い。すなわち、当該商品は、販売実績xが示す以上の需要が見込まれるため、α1を1よりも大きい値に定める。
Since the products plotted in the first segment have a large sales record x and a large shortage record y, there is a high possibility that the number of sales will increase further by reducing the shortage. That is, since the demand for the product is expected to be higher than that indicated by the sales record x, α 1 is set to a value larger than 1.
第2セグメントにプロットされた商品は、販売実績xが小さいものの、欠品実績yが大きいので、欠品を減らすことにより、販売数が増える可能性が高い。すなわち、当該商品は、販売実績xが示す以上の需要が見込まれるため、α2を1よりも大きい値に定める。
The products plotted in the second segment have a small sales record x but a large shortage record y, so there is a high possibility that the number of sales will increase by reducing the shortage. That is, since the demand for the product is expected to be higher than that indicated by the sales record x, α 2 is set to a value larger than 1.
第3セグメントにプロットされた商品は、販売実績xが大きいものの、欠品実績yは小さいので、これ以上販売数が増える可能性が小さい。すなわち、販売実績xが当該商品の現状の需要を示していると想定されるため、α3を1以下の値に定める。
The products plotted in the third segment have a large sales record x, but a small shortage record y, so it is unlikely that the number of sales will increase any more. That is, since it is assumed that the sales record x indicates the current demand of the product, α 3 is set to a value of 1 or less.
第4セグメントにプロットされた商品は、販売実績xが小さく、欠品実績yも小さいので、これ以上販売数が増える可能性が小さい。すなわち、販売実績xが当該商品の現状の需要を示していると想定されるため、α4を1以下の値に定める。
Since the products plotted in the fourth segment have a small sales record x and a small shortage record y, it is unlikely that the number of sales will increase any more. That is, since it is assumed that the sales record x indicates the current demand of the product, α 4 is set to a value of 1 or less.
なお、商品の需要変数fは、当該商品の欠品頻度と当該商品の販売数との間の正の相関の強さに応じて算出されてもよい。欠品頻度と販売数との間の相関の強さは、例えば、重回帰分析によって分析されてよい。
The demand variable f of the product may be calculated according to the strength of the positive correlation between the frequency of shortage of the product and the number of sales of the product. The strength of the correlation between the frequency of shortages and the number of units sold may be analyzed, for example, by multiple regression analysis.
<在庫変数の算出方法>
在庫変数gは、商品のバックヤードのサイズに基づいて算出される。例えば、商品の在庫変数gは、当該商品が在庫として保持されるバックヤードのサイズが大きいほど、大きく算出される。なお、バックヤードのサイズは、商品の種類が、例えば、常温、要冷蔵、及び、要冷凍のうちの何れかであるかによって異なってよい。常温の商品、要冷蔵の商品、及び、要冷凍の商品は、それぞれ、異なるバックヤードに格納されるからである。 <Calculation method of inventory variables>
The inventory variable g is calculated based on the size of the backyard of the goods. For example, the inventory variable g of a product is calculated larger as the size of the backyard in which the product is held as inventory is larger. The size of the backyard may differ depending on whether the type of product is, for example, normal temperature, refrigeration required, or freezing required. This is because products at room temperature, products that require refrigeration, and products that require freezing are stored in different backyards.
在庫変数gは、商品のバックヤードのサイズに基づいて算出される。例えば、商品の在庫変数gは、当該商品が在庫として保持されるバックヤードのサイズが大きいほど、大きく算出される。なお、バックヤードのサイズは、商品の種類が、例えば、常温、要冷蔵、及び、要冷凍のうちの何れかであるかによって異なってよい。常温の商品、要冷蔵の商品、及び、要冷凍の商品は、それぞれ、異なるバックヤードに格納されるからである。 <Calculation method of inventory variables>
The inventory variable g is calculated based on the size of the backyard of the goods. For example, the inventory variable g of a product is calculated larger as the size of the backyard in which the product is held as inventory is larger. The size of the backyard may differ depending on whether the type of product is, for example, normal temperature, refrigeration required, or freezing required. This is because products at room temperature, products that require refrigeration, and products that require freezing are stored in different backyards.
バックヤードのサイズは、種類が共通する複数の商品によってシェアされてよい。この場合、種類が共通する複数の商品は、バックヤードのサイズの上限を超えないように格納される。加えて、在庫変数gは、商品の1日の平均販売数量に基づいて算出されてよい。
The size of the backyard may be shared by multiple products of the same type. In this case, a plurality of products of the same type are stored so as not to exceed the upper limit of the size of the backyard. In addition, the inventory variable g may be calculated based on the average daily sales volume of the goods.
<販売ポイントの算出方法>
商品の販売ポイントCは、次の式2によって算出されてよい。
C=f×g×P×U …(式2)
ここで、fは、Cの算出対象の商品の需要変数を示す。gは、Cの算出対象の商品の在庫変数を示す。Pは、Cの算出対象の商品の価格を示す。Uは、Cの算出対象のSKU(Stock Keeping Unit)数を示す。 <Calculation method of sales points>
The selling point C of the product may be calculated by the followingformula 2.
C = f × g × P × U ... (Equation 2)
Here, f indicates a demand variable of the product for which C is to be calculated. g indicates an inventory variable of the product for which C is to be calculated. P indicates the price of the product for which C is calculated. U indicates the number of SKUs (Stock Keeping Units) to be calculated by C.
商品の販売ポイントCは、次の式2によって算出されてよい。
C=f×g×P×U …(式2)
ここで、fは、Cの算出対象の商品の需要変数を示す。gは、Cの算出対象の商品の在庫変数を示す。Pは、Cの算出対象の商品の価格を示す。Uは、Cの算出対象のSKU(Stock Keeping Unit)数を示す。 <Calculation method of sales points>
The selling point C of the product may be calculated by the following
C = f × g × P × U ... (Equation 2)
Here, f indicates a demand variable of the product for which C is to be calculated. g indicates an inventory variable of the product for which C is to be calculated. P indicates the price of the product for which C is calculated. U indicates the number of SKUs (Stock Keeping Units) to be calculated by C.
すなわち、販売ポイントCは、需要が大きく、価格が高い商品ほど、大きな値となる。また、需要変数fには、上記の通り欠品係数αが含まれているので、販売ポイントCは、欠品頻度が高い商品ほど、大きな値となる。また、販売ポイントCは、在庫能力が高い商品ほど、大きな値となる。
That is, the sales point C becomes larger as the demand is higher and the price is higher. Further, since the demand variable f includes the out-of-stock coefficient α as described above, the selling point C becomes a larger value as the product has a higher out-of-stock frequency. Further, the selling point C becomes a larger value as the product has a higher inventory capacity.
販売ポイントCには上限値が設けられてよい。業務支援装置300は、算出された販売ポイントCが上限値を超える場合、上限値を販売ポイントCとしてよい。上限値は、商品が陳列されるエリアのサイズに基づいて定められてよい。例えば、エリアのサイズが大きいほど、上限値は大きく設定される。また、上限値は、商品の供給ポイントに基づいて定められてよい。供給ポイントは、商品の供給能力を示す値である。供給ポイントは、SCM(Supply Chain Management)の効率の高さに基づいて算出されてよい。SCMの効率は、商品の製造能力、及び、物流能力に基づいて算出されてよい。例えば、供給ポイントが大きいほど、上限値は大きく設定される。また、供給ポイントは、一度の発注で実現できる「数量×利益」の値が高いほど、大きくなる値であってもよい。ここで、「利益=販売額-原価」であってよい。利益には、過去の値引きの実績値が考慮されてよい。なお、新商品の販売ポイントCの初期値は、当該新商品の供給ポイントと在庫ポイントの合計値であってよい。
An upper limit may be set for the sales point C. When the calculated sales point C exceeds the upper limit value, the business support device 300 may set the upper limit value as the sales point C. The upper limit may be set based on the size of the area where the goods are displayed. For example, the larger the area size, the larger the upper limit is set. Further, the upper limit value may be set based on the supply point of the product. The supply point is a value indicating the supply capacity of the product. The supply point may be calculated based on the high efficiency of SCM (Supply Chain Management). The efficiency of SCM may be calculated based on the manufacturing capacity of the product and the distribution capacity. For example, the larger the supply point, the larger the upper limit is set. Further, the supply point may be a value that becomes larger as the value of "quantity x profit" that can be realized by one order is higher. Here, "profit = sales amount-cost" may be used. The profit may take into account the actual value of past discounts. The initial value of the sales point C of the new product may be the total value of the supply point and the inventory point of the new product.
<位置ポイントの算出方法>
図41は、実施の形態5に係る位置ポイントの算出方法の一例を説明するための図である。 <Calculation method of position point>
FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining an example of a method of calculating a position point according to the fifth embodiment.
図41は、実施の形態5に係る位置ポイントの算出方法の一例を説明するための図である。 <Calculation method of position point>
FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining an example of a method of calculating a position point according to the fifth embodiment.
エリアに設置された各陳列棚10には、位置ポイントDが割り当てられる。位置ポイントDは、陳列棚10の位置によって異なってよい。例えば、エリアへの動線入口に近い陳列棚10には、エリアの動線出口に近い陳列棚10よりも、大きな位置ポイントDが割り当てられてよい。
Position point D is assigned to each display shelf 10 installed in the area. The position point D may be different depending on the position of the display shelf 10. For example, the display shelf 10 near the flow line entrance to the area may be assigned a larger position point D than the display shelf 10 near the flow line exit of the area.
陳列棚10に割り当てられた位置ポイントDは、陳列棚10の各棚段に配分されてよい。各棚段に配分される位置ポイントDの割合は、棚段の位置の売れやすさによって異なってよい。例えば、客の目線よりも少し下(例えば120cm~130cm)の棚段が最も売れやすい場合、その棚段に割り当てられる位置ポイントDの割合は、客の目線よりも上の棚段に割り当てられる位置ポイントDの割合よりも大きくてよい。なお、商品が最も入れやすい棚段の位置、高さ及び幅等は、商品カテゴリ又は棚の形状等によって変化し得る。例えば、最下段に大量の商品が陳列される棚の形状であり、かつ、最下段が手に取りやすい高さに設定されている場合、その最下段の位置が最も売れやすい。この場合、その最下段の位置に最も多くの位置ポイントDが配分されてよい。
The position point D assigned to the display shelf 10 may be distributed to each shelf of the display shelf 10. The ratio of the position points D distributed to each shelf may differ depending on the ease of selling the position of the shelf. For example, if a shelf slightly below the customer's line of sight (for example, 120 cm to 130 cm) is the easiest to sell, the percentage of position point D assigned to that shelf is the position assigned to the shelf above the customer's line of sight. It may be larger than the ratio of point D. The position, height, width, etc. of the shelf where the product is most easily put can change depending on the product category, the shape of the shelf, and the like. For example, if the shape of a shelf is such that a large number of products are displayed at the bottom and the bottom is set to a height that is easy to pick up, the position of the bottom is the easiest to sell. In this case, the largest number of position points D may be allocated to the lowest position.
例えば、業務支援装置300は、図41に示すように、エリアに割り当てられた位置ポイント「100」のうち、「50」を動線入口に近い陳列棚10Aに、「30」を動線中間の陳列棚10Bに、「20」を動線出口に近い陳列棚10Cに割り当てる。そして、業務支援装置300は、陳列棚10Aに割り当てた位置ポイント「50」のうち、「10」を1段目の棚段に、「30」を最も売れやすい2段目の棚段に、「20」を3段目の棚段に割り当てる。業務支援装置300は、陳列棚10B及び陳列棚10Cについても、図41に示すように、位置ポイントを各棚段に割り当てる。これにより、各棚段に対して位置ポイントDが割り当てられる。
For example, in the business support device 300, as shown in FIG. 41, among the position points "100" assigned to the area, "50" is set to the display shelf 10A near the flow line entrance, and "30" is set to the middle of the flow line. "20" is assigned to the display shelf 10B and the display shelf 10C near the flow line exit. Then, in the business support device 300, among the position points "50" assigned to the display shelf 10A, "10" is assigned to the first shelf and "30" is assigned to the second shelf, which is the easiest to sell. 20 ”is assigned to the third shelf. As shown in FIG. 41, the business support device 300 also assigns position points to the display shelves 10B and the display shelves 10C to each shelf stage. As a result, the position point D is assigned to each shelf.
<棚割レイアウトの生成方法>
次に、棚割レイアウト5003の生成方法について説明する。 <How to generate a shelf layout>
Next, a method of generating theshelf layout layout 5003 will be described.
次に、棚割レイアウト5003の生成方法について説明する。 <How to generate a shelf layout>
Next, a method of generating the
業務支援装置300は、商品カテゴリ毎に、当該商品カテゴリに属する商品を陳列するエリアを決定する。業務支援装置300は、そのエリアに陳列される商品を最適に配置するための棚割レイアウト5003を生成する。以下、詳細に説明する。
The business support device 300 determines an area for displaying products belonging to the product category for each product category. The business support device 300 generates a shelf layout layout 5003 for optimally arranging the products displayed in the area. Hereinafter, it will be described in detail.
上記の販売ポイントの算出方法及び位置ポイントの算出方法で説明したように、各商品には販売ポイントCが対応付けられ、陳列棚10の各棚段には位置ポイントDが割り当てられる。業務支援装置300は、位置ポイントDが割り当てられている棚段に、販売ポイントCが対応付けられている商品を陳列する区画を設定した場合、当該区画の商品ポイントFを、F=C×Dとして算出する。
As described above in the sales point calculation method and the position point calculation method, the sales point C is associated with each product, and the position point D is assigned to each shelf of the display shelf 10. When the business support device 300 sets a section for displaying products associated with the sales point C on the shelf to which the position point D is assigned, the product point F in the section is set to F = C × D. Calculated as.
業務支援装置300は、エリアに陳列すべき各商品を当該エリアの各陳列棚10の各棚段に陳列した場合における、各商品ポイントFの合計を算出する。すなわち、業務支援装置300は、エリアに陳列される各商品の商品ポイントFの合計を算出する。以下、当該合計を「エリア合計値」と称する。業務支援装置300は、エリア合計値が最大となるような、エリアの棚割レイアウト5003を自動的に生成する。例えば、業務支援装置300は、様々なパターンの棚割レイアウト5003を試作し、試作した各棚割レイアウト5003のエリア合計値を比較し、エリア合計値が最大となる棚割レイアウト5003を選択する。
The business support device 300 calculates the total of each product point F when each product to be displayed in the area is displayed on each shelf of each display shelf 10 in the area. That is, the business support device 300 calculates the total of the product points F of each product displayed in the area. Hereinafter, the total is referred to as an "area total value". The business support device 300 automatically generates a shelf layout 5003 for an area so that the total area value is maximized. For example, the business support device 300 prototypes various patterns of shelf allocation layouts 5003, compares the area total values of the prototype shelf allocation layouts 5003, and selects the shelf allocation layout 5003 having the maximum area total value.
なお、業務支援装置300は、特定の商品を陳列する区画30を、棚割レイアウト5003に手動で設定するための機能を提供してよい。例えば、担当者2は、店舗又は本社からの指示に基づいて、特定の商品を陳列する区画30を、棚割レイアウト5003に手動設定する。この場合、業務支援装置300は、手動設定された商品及び区画30を除外して、棚割レイアウト5003の自動生成処理を実行してよい。
The business support device 300 may provide a function for manually setting a section 30 for displaying a specific product in the shelf layout layout 5003. For example, the person in charge 2 manually sets the section 30 for displaying a specific product in the shelf layout layout 5003 based on an instruction from the store or the head office. In this case, the business support device 300 may execute the automatic generation process of the shelf allocation layout 5003 by excluding the manually set product and the section 30.
また、商品には、定番商品、新商品、期間限定商品といった商品特性を示す情報が対応付けられてよい。業務支援装置300は、指定された商品特性を有する商品を優先的に位置ポイントの高い棚段に配置するための機能を提供してよい。例えば、業務支援装置300は、担当者2から定番商品を優先するよう指定された場合、商品特性が「定番商品」の商品を、位置ポイントDの高い棚段に優先的に配置して、棚割レイアウト5003を生成してよい。
In addition, information indicating product characteristics such as standard products, new products, and limited-time products may be associated with products. The business support device 300 may provide a function for preferentially arranging a product having a designated product characteristic on a shelf with a high position point. For example, when the person in charge 2 specifies that the standard product is prioritized, the business support device 300 preferentially arranges the product having the product characteristic of "standard product" on the shelf with the higher position point D, and puts the shelf on the shelf. The split layout 5003 may be generated.
また、特設コーナーのような特別な催事が行われるエリアは、棚割レイアウト5003の生成の対象外とされてよい。
Also, areas where special events are held, such as special corners, may be excluded from the generation of the shelf layout layout 5003.
<棚割レイアウトの変更>
図42及び図43は、棚割レイアウト5003の変更例を説明するための図である。なお、図42及び図43において、販売ポイントCの比較的大きい商品を横線塗りつぶしで表現し、販売ポイントCの比較的小さい商品を点描塗りつぶしで表現している。 <Change of shelf layout>
42 and 43 are diagrams for explaining a modified example of theshelf layout layout 5003. In FIGS. 42 and 43, a product having a relatively large sales point C is represented by a horizontal line fill, and a product having a relatively small sales point C is represented by a pointillist fill.
図42及び図43は、棚割レイアウト5003の変更例を説明するための図である。なお、図42及び図43において、販売ポイントCの比較的大きい商品を横線塗りつぶしで表現し、販売ポイントCの比較的小さい商品を点描塗りつぶしで表現している。 <Change of shelf layout>
42 and 43 are diagrams for explaining a modified example of the
図42において、上図は元の棚割レイアウト5003を示し、下図は新たに生成された棚割レイアウト5003を示す。例えば、業務支援装置300は、図42の上図から下図への変化に示すように、販売ポイントCの比較的大きい商品の区画30Aを、販売ポイントCの比較的小さい商品が配置されていた区画30Bの方向(左方向)に拡大した棚割レイアウト5003を表示する。この場合、図42の下図に示すように、業務支援装置300は、区画30Aを拡大する方向を示す矢印5004を表示してよい。
In FIG. 42, the upper figure shows the original shelf layout layout 5003, and the lower figure shows the newly generated shelf layout layout 5003. For example, in the business support device 300, as shown in the change from the upper figure to the lower figure of FIG. 42, the section 30A of the product having a relatively large selling point C and the section 30A in which the product having a relatively small selling point C are arranged The shelf allocation layout 5003 enlarged in the direction of 30B (leftward) is displayed. In this case, as shown in the lower figure of FIG. 42, the business support device 300 may display an arrow 5004 indicating a direction in which the section 30A is expanded.
図43において、上図は元の棚割レイアウト5003を示し、下図は新たに生成された棚割レイアウト5003を示す。例えば、業務支援装置300は、図43の上図から下図への変化に示すように、区画30Cに配置されていた販売ポイントCの比較的大きい商品を、区画30Dに配置されていた販売ポイントCの比較的小さい商品と入れ替えた棚割レイアウト5003を表示する。この場合、図44の下図に示すように、区画30Cと区画30Dとの間での商品の入れ替えを示す矢印5005を表示してよい。
In FIG. 43, the upper figure shows the original shelf layout layout 5003, and the lower figure shows the newly generated shelf layout layout 5003. For example, in the business support device 300, as shown in the change from the upper figure to the lower figure of FIG. 43, the product having a relatively large selling point C arranged in the section 30C is replaced with the selling point C arranged in the section 30D. The shelf allocation layout 5003 replaced with the relatively small product of is displayed. In this case, as shown in the lower figure of FIG. 44, an arrow 5005 indicating the replacement of goods between the compartments 30C and the compartments 30D may be displayed.
<補足及び変形例>
商品には、当該商品の基本的な情報を示す商品基本情報が関連付けられてよい。商品基本情報には、商品のFACEサイズ(高さ×幅×奥行)、商品の発売日、商品の賞味期限、商品カテゴリが含まれてよい。商品カテゴリは、必要に応じて、複数の階層を有してよい。業務支援装置300は、商品基本情報を用いて、販売ポイントCを補正してもよい。 <Supplementary and modified examples>
The product may be associated with basic product information indicating the basic information of the product. The basic product information may include the FACE size (height x width x depth) of the product, the release date of the product, the expiration date of the product, and the product category. The product category may have a plurality of layers, if necessary. Thebusiness support device 300 may correct the sales point C by using the basic product information.
商品には、当該商品の基本的な情報を示す商品基本情報が関連付けられてよい。商品基本情報には、商品のFACEサイズ(高さ×幅×奥行)、商品の発売日、商品の賞味期限、商品カテゴリが含まれてよい。商品カテゴリは、必要に応じて、複数の階層を有してよい。業務支援装置300は、商品基本情報を用いて、販売ポイントCを補正してもよい。 <Supplementary and modified examples>
The product may be associated with basic product information indicating the basic information of the product. The basic product information may include the FACE size (height x width x depth) of the product, the release date of the product, the expiration date of the product, and the product category. The product category may have a plurality of layers, if necessary. The
陳列棚10には、当該陳列棚10のサイズ及び位置に関する棚基本情報が関連付けられてよい。棚基本情報には、各棚段の幅、高さ、奥行を示す情報、及び、棚段の拡張性を示す情報が含まれてよい。加えて、棚基本情報には、棚が配置されている座標(店舗フロアも含む)を示す情報が含まれてよい。業務支援装置300は、棚基本情報を用いて、位置ポイントDを補正してもよい。
The display shelf 10 may be associated with basic shelf information regarding the size and position of the display shelf 10. The shelf basic information may include information indicating the width, height, and depth of each shelf, and information indicating the expandability of the shelf. In addition, the shelf basic information may include information indicating the coordinates (including the store floor) where the shelves are arranged. The business support device 300 may correct the position point D by using the shelf basic information.
業務支援装置300は、商品の供給能力の見直しが発生した場合、製造実行システム(Manufacturing Execution System;MES)、及び、輸配送管理システム(Transport Management System;TMS)のうちの少なくとも1つと連動して、商品の供給能力の最適化を検討してよい。
The business support device 300 is linked with at least one of the manufacturing execution system (Manufacturing Execution System; MES) and the transport management system (Transport Management System; TMS) when the product supply capacity is reviewed. , You may consider optimizing the supply capacity of the goods.
業務支援装置300は、棚に配置される各商品の販売履歴情報5001及び欠品履歴情報5002のうちの少なくとも1つに基づいて、当該棚に配置される各商品の商品パラメータを算出し、算出した商品パラメータに基づいて、当該棚に配置する各商品の数を増減して棚割レイアウト5003を生成してよい。ただし、棚の単位に限らず、所望のある一定のエリア単位で、棚割レイアウト5003が生成されてもよい。例えば、商品区分エリア(例えば牛乳エリア、調味料エリア、文房具エリア、お菓子エリア、チョコレート菓子エリア、野菜エリアなど)毎に棚割レイアウト5003が生成されてもよい。
The business support device 300 calculates and calculates the product parameters of each product placed on the shelf based on at least one of the sales history information 5001 and the shortage history information 5002 of each product placed on the shelf. The shelf allocation layout 5003 may be generated by increasing or decreasing the number of each product arranged on the shelf based on the product parameters. However, the shelf layout layout 5003 may be generated not only in units of shelves but also in certain desired area units. For example, the shelf layout 5003 may be generated for each product category area (for example, milk area, seasoning area, stationery area, confectionery area, chocolate confectionery area, vegetable area, etc.).
(本開示に係る補足及び変形例)
上記の「陳列棚」は、「棚」、「ゴンドラ」、「ハイゴンドラ」といった他の用語に読み替えられてもよい。また、商品は、棚段に配置される場合に限られず、例えば、棚のエンドに配置されてもよいし、平置き用の棚に配置されてもよい。 (Supplementary information and modification examples related to this disclosure)
The above "display shelf" may be read as other terms such as "shelf", "gondola", and "high gondola". Further, the product is not limited to the case where it is arranged on the shelf, and may be arranged, for example, at the end of the shelf or on a shelf for flat placement.
上記の「陳列棚」は、「棚」、「ゴンドラ」、「ハイゴンドラ」といった他の用語に読み替えられてもよい。また、商品は、棚段に配置される場合に限られず、例えば、棚のエンドに配置されてもよいし、平置き用の棚に配置されてもよい。 (Supplementary information and modification examples related to this disclosure)
The above "display shelf" may be read as other terms such as "shelf", "gondola", and "high gondola". Further, the product is not limited to the case where it is arranged on the shelf, and may be arranged, for example, at the end of the shelf or on a shelf for flat placement.
上記の棚は、店舗の売り場の棚に限られず、例えば、倉庫又はバックヤードの棚であってもよい。商品は、倉庫又はバックヤードの棚及び/又はカードに配置されてもよい。あるいは、商品は、倉庫又はバックヤードにおいて、段ボールに格納されて積み重ねられてもよい。また、倉庫又はバックヤードにおける商品の置き場所は、商品のカテゴリ別に定められてもよい。また、倉庫又はバックヤードは、入庫日時の古い商品(例えば使用期限又は賞味期限が早い商品、又は、製造日が古い商品)から順番に出庫できるようなレイアウト(つまりFIFO(First-In First-Out)レイアウト)であってよい。
The above shelves are not limited to the shelves in the store's sales floor, and may be, for example, shelves in a warehouse or backyard. Goods may be placed on shelves and / or cards in warehouses or backyards. Alternatively, the goods may be stored and stacked in cardboard in a warehouse or backyard. In addition, the storage location of the products in the warehouse or the backyard may be determined for each product category. In addition, the warehouse or backyard has a layout (that is, FIFO (First-In First-Out)) so that products with the oldest warehousing date and time (for example, products with an earlier expiration date or expiration date, or products with an older manufacturing date) can be delivered in order. ) Layout).
上記では、カメラ装置100で陳列棚10を撮影し、その撮影画像を分析することにより欠品を検知しているが、カメラ装置100とは異なる装置を用いて欠品を検知してもよい。例えば、カメラ装置100に代えて又はカメラ装置100と共に赤外線ToF(Time Of Flight)センサを用いて棚の点群データを生成し、欠品検知装置200は、その点群データを分析して欠品を検知してもよい。あるいは、棚段の商品が置かれる面に重量センサを設置し、欠品検知装置200は、重量センサから得られた重量変化に基づいて欠品を検知してもよい。あるいは、棚段の商品が置かれる面に温度センサを設置し、欠品検知装置200は、温度センサから得られた温度変化に基づいて欠品を検知してもよい。
In the above, the display shelf 10 is photographed by the camera device 100, and the shortage is detected by analyzing the captured image. However, the missing item may be detected by using a device different from the camera device 100. For example, instead of the camera device 100 or together with the camera device 100, an infrared ToF (Time Of Flight) sensor is used to generate point cloud data on the shelf, and the shortage detection device 200 analyzes the point cloud data and is out of stock. May be detected. Alternatively, a weight sensor may be installed on the surface of the shelf on which the product is placed, and the shortage detection device 200 may detect the shortage based on the weight change obtained from the weight sensor. Alternatively, a temperature sensor may be installed on the surface of the shelf on which the product is placed, and the shortage detection device 200 may detect the shortage based on the temperature change obtained from the temperature sensor.
各店舗を統括する本社が計画した商品配置は「プラノグラム(Planogram)」と呼ばれる。一方、店舗における商品配置の実態は「リアログラム(Realogram)」と呼ばれる。
実施の形態5で説明した棚割レイアウト5003は、プラノグラムとして生成され、リアログラムとして記録されてもよい。 The product layout planned by the head office that controls each store is called "Planogram". On the other hand, the actual state of product placement in stores is called "Realogram".
Theshelving layout 5003 described in Embodiment 5 may be generated as a planogram and recorded as a realogram.
実施の形態5で説明した棚割レイアウト5003は、プラノグラムとして生成され、リアログラムとして記録されてもよい。 The product layout planned by the head office that controls each store is called "Planogram". On the other hand, the actual state of product placement in stores is called "Realogram".
The
以上、添付図面を参照しながら実施の形態について説明したが、本開示はかかる例に限定されない。当業者であれば、特許請求の範囲に記載された範疇内において、各種の変更例、修正例、置換例、付加例、削除例、均等例に想到し得ることは明らかであり、それらについても本開示の技術的範囲に属すると了解される。また、発明の趣旨を逸脱しない範囲において、上述した実施の形態における各構成要素を任意に組み合わせてもよい。
Although the embodiment has been described above with reference to the attached drawings, the present disclosure is not limited to such an example. It is clear that a person skilled in the art can come up with various modifications, modifications, substitutions, additions, deletions, and even examples within the scope of the claims. It is understood that it belongs to the technical scope of the present disclosure. Further, each component in the above-described embodiment may be arbitrarily combined as long as the gist of the invention is not deviated.
なお、本出願は、2020年8月26日出願の日本特許出願(特願2020-142828)に基づくものであり、その内容は本出願の中に参照として援用される。
Note that this application is based on a Japanese patent application filed on August 26, 2020 (Japanese Patent Application No. 2020-142828), the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
本開示は、欠品に関する業務を支援するシステムに利用可能である。
This disclosure can be used for a system that supports operations related to shortages.
2 担当者
10 陳列棚
11 棚板
12 陳列スペース
20 棚札
30 区画
100 カメラ装置
200 欠品検知装置
201 処理部
202 メモリ
203 通信部
204 ストレージ
205 内部バス
210 棚割情報
300 業務支援装置
301 処理部
302 メモリ
303 通信部
304 ストレージ
305 内部バス
310 管理情報
400 端末
401 処理部
402 メモリ
403 通信部
404 入力部
405 表示部
406 ストレージ
407 内部バス
900 ログインUI
910 サービスメニューUI
1000 欠品情報UI
1100 棚地図UI
1200 陳列棚UI
1300 棚地図UI
1400 陳列棚UI
1500 注文履歴UI
1600 棚地図UI
1700 棚割アドバイスUI
1800 棚割変更UI
1900 価格変更UI
2000 通知UI
2100 マップUI
2200 通知一覧UI
2300 通知詳細UI
3000 第1棚画像
3001 外観画像の枠
3002 区画の枠
3003 商品列数
3100 第2棚画像
3101 欠品枠
3102 誤配置枠
4001 アラートステータス
4002 在庫情報
5001 販売履歴情報
5002 欠品履歴情報
5003 棚割レイアウト 2 Person incharge 10 Display shelf 11 Shelf board 12 Display space 20 Shelf tag 30 Section 100 Camera device 200 Out of stock detection device 201 Processing unit 202 Memory 203 Communication unit 204 Storage 205 Internal bus 210 Shelf allocation information 300 Business support device 301 Processing unit 302 Memory 303 Communication unit 304 Storage 305 Internal bus 310 Management information 400 Terminal 401 Processing unit 402 Memory 403 Communication unit 404 Input unit 405 Display unit 406 Storage 407 Internal bus 900 Login UI
910 Service Menu UI
1000 Out of stock information UI
1100 Shelf Map UI
1200 Display Shelf UI
1300 Shelf Map UI
1400 Display Shelf UI
1500 order history UI
1600 shelf map UI
1700 Shelf allocation advice UI
1800 Shelf allocation change UI
1900 Price change UI
2000 Notification UI
2100 map UI
2200 Notification list UI
2300 Notification details UI
30001st shelf image 3001 Appearance image frame 3002 Section frame 3003 Number of product rows 3100 2nd shelf image 3101 Missing item frame 3102 Misplacement frame 4001 Alert status 4002 Inventory information 5001 Sales history information 5002 Missing item history information 5003 Shelf allocation layout
10 陳列棚
11 棚板
12 陳列スペース
20 棚札
30 区画
100 カメラ装置
200 欠品検知装置
201 処理部
202 メモリ
203 通信部
204 ストレージ
205 内部バス
210 棚割情報
300 業務支援装置
301 処理部
302 メモリ
303 通信部
304 ストレージ
305 内部バス
310 管理情報
400 端末
401 処理部
402 メモリ
403 通信部
404 入力部
405 表示部
406 ストレージ
407 内部バス
900 ログインUI
910 サービスメニューUI
1000 欠品情報UI
1100 棚地図UI
1200 陳列棚UI
1300 棚地図UI
1400 陳列棚UI
1500 注文履歴UI
1600 棚地図UI
1700 棚割アドバイスUI
1800 棚割変更UI
1900 価格変更UI
2000 通知UI
2100 マップUI
2200 通知一覧UI
2300 通知詳細UI
3000 第1棚画像
3001 外観画像の枠
3002 区画の枠
3003 商品列数
3100 第2棚画像
3101 欠品枠
3102 誤配置枠
4001 アラートステータス
4002 在庫情報
5001 販売履歴情報
5002 欠品履歴情報
5003 棚割レイアウト 2 Person in
910 Service Menu UI
1000 Out of stock information UI
1100 Shelf Map UI
1200 Display Shelf UI
1300 Shelf Map UI
1400 Display Shelf UI
1500 order history UI
1600 shelf map UI
1700 Shelf allocation advice UI
1800 Shelf allocation change UI
1900 Price change UI
2000 Notification UI
2100 map UI
2200 Notification list UI
2300 Notification details UI
3000
Claims (16)
- 欠品または部分欠品が検知された棚及び物品を示す欠品検知情報、及び、前記物品の在庫状況を示す在庫情報を受信する受信部と、
前記在庫情報に示される前記欠品または部分欠品が検知された前記物品の在庫状況に基づいて、前記欠品検知情報に示される欠品または部分欠品が検知された前記物品の前記棚への補充を促す情報の送信タイミングを制御する処理部と、を備える、
業務支援装置。 A receiving unit that receives out-of-stock detection information indicating a shelf and an article in which a missing item or a partial missing item is detected, and inventory information indicating the inventory status of the article.
Based on the inventory status of the article in which the shortage or partial shortage is detected shown in the inventory information, to the shelf of the article in which the shortage or partial shortage shown in the shortage detection information is detected. A processing unit that controls the transmission timing of information prompting the replenishment of
Business support device. - 前記処理部は、欠品または部分欠品が検知された前記物品の在庫が存在しない場合、前記補充を促す情報を送信しない、
請求項1に記載の業務支援装置。 The processing unit does not send the information prompting the replenishment when the inventory of the article in which the shortage or the partial shortage is detected does not exist.
The business support device according to claim 1. - 前記処理部は、欠品または部分欠品が検知された前記物品の在庫が存在する場合、前記補充を促す情報を送信する、
請求項1又は2に記載の業務支援装置。 The processing unit transmits information prompting the replenishment when there is an inventory of the article in which a shortage or a partial shortage is detected.
The business support device according to claim 1 or 2. - 前記処理部は、欠品または部分欠品が検知された前記物品が前記棚に存在せず、かつ、欠品または部分欠品が検知された前記物品の在庫が存在する場合、前記補充を促す情報を送信する、
請求項1又は2に記載の業務支援装置。 The processing unit prompts the replenishment when the article in which the missing item or the partial missing item is detected does not exist in the shelf and the inventory of the article in which the missing item or the partial missing item is detected exists. Send information,
The business support device according to claim 1 or 2. - 前記処理部は、欠品または部分欠品が検知された前記物品の少なくとも一部が前記棚に存在する場合、前記棚に存在する前記物品の整理を促す情報を送信する、
請求項4に記載の業務支援装置。 When at least a part of the article in which a missing item or a partial missing item is detected is present on the shelf, the processing unit transmits information prompting the organization of the article existing on the shelf.
The business support device according to claim 4. - 前記処理部は、欠品または部分欠品が検知された前記物品の在庫が存在せず、かつ、前記棚に存在する他の物品の在庫が存在する場合、前記他の物品を前記物品の代わりに補充することを促す情報を送信する、
請求項1に記載の業務支援装置。 When the processing unit does not have an inventory of the article for which a shortage or a partial shortage has been detected and has an inventory of another article existing on the shelf, the processing unit replaces the other article with the article. Send information to replenish
The business support device according to claim 1. - 情報処理装置によって、
欠品または部分欠品が検知された棚及び物品を示す欠品検知情報、及び、前記物品の在庫状況を示す在庫情報を受信し、
前記在庫情報に示される前記欠品または部分欠品が検知された前記物品の在庫状況に基づいて、前記欠品検知情報に示される欠品または部分欠品が検知された前記物品の前記棚への補充を促す情報の送信タイミングを制御する、
業務支援方法。 Depending on the information processing device
Receives out-of-stock detection information indicating shelves and articles in which a shortage or partial shortage is detected, and inventory information indicating the inventory status of the article.
Based on the inventory status of the article in which the shortage or partial shortage is detected shown in the inventory information, to the shelf of the article in which the shortage or partial shortage shown in the shortage detection information is detected. Control the transmission timing of information that prompts replenishment of
Business support method. - 欠品または部分欠品が検知された棚及び物品を示す欠品検知情報、及び、前記物品の在庫状況を示す在庫情報を受信し、
前記在庫情報に示される前記欠品または部分欠品が検知された前記物品の在庫状況に基づいて、前記欠品検知情報に示される欠品または部分欠品が検知された前記物品の前記棚への補充を促す情報の送信タイミングを制御する、ことをコンピュータに実行させる、
コンピュータプログラム。 Receives out-of-stock detection information indicating shelves and articles in which a shortage or partial shortage is detected, and inventory information indicating the inventory status of the article.
Based on the inventory status of the article in which the shortage or partial shortage is detected shown in the inventory information, to the shelf of the article in which the shortage or partial shortage shown in the shortage detection information is detected. Control the timing of sending information that prompts you to replenish, let the computer do that,
Computer program. - 補充の必要性が検知された棚及び物品を示す補充検知情報、及び、前記物品の在庫状況を示す在庫情報を受信する受信部と、
前記在庫情報に示される補充の必要性が検知された前記物品の在庫状況に基づいて、前記補充検知情報に示される補充の必要性が検知された前記物品の前記棚への補充を促す情報の送信タイミングを制御する処理部と、を備える、
業務支援装置。 A receiver that receives replenishment detection information indicating the shelves and articles for which the need for replenishment has been detected, and inventory information indicating the inventory status of the articles, and
Based on the inventory status of the article in which the necessity of replenishment indicated in the inventory information is detected, the information prompting the replenishment of the article in which the necessity of replenishment indicated in the replenishment detection information is detected is urged. A processing unit that controls transmission timing is provided.
Business support device. - 前記処理部は、補充の必要性が検知された前記物品の在庫が存在しない場合、前記補充を促す情報を送信しない、
請求項9に記載の業務支援装置。 The processing unit does not send information prompting the replenishment when the article in which the need for replenishment is detected is not in stock.
The business support device according to claim 9. - 前記処理部は、補充の必要性が検知された前記物品の在庫が存在する場合、前記補充を促す情報を送信する、
請求項9又は10に記載の業務支援装置。 If there is an inventory of the article for which the need for replenishment has been detected, the processing unit transmits information prompting the replenishment.
The business support device according to claim 9 or 10. - 前記処理部は、補充の必要性が検知された前記物品が前記棚に存在せず、かつ、補充の必要性が検知された前記物品の在庫が存在する場合、前記補充を促す情報を送信する、
請求項9又は10に記載の業務支援装置。 When the article for which the need for replenishment is detected does not exist on the shelf and the article for which the need for replenishment is detected is in stock, the processing unit transmits information prompting the replenishment. ,
The business support device according to claim 9 or 10. - 前記処理部は、補充の必要性が検知された前記物品の少なくとも一部が前記棚に存在する場合、前記棚に存在する前記物品の整理を促す情報を送信する、
請求項12に記載の業務支援装置。 When at least a part of the article for which the need for replenishment is detected is present on the shelf, the processing unit transmits information prompting the organization of the article existing on the shelf.
The business support device according to claim 12. - 前記処理部は、補充の必要性が検知された前記物品の在庫が存在せず、かつ前記棚に存在する他の物品の在庫が存在する場合、前記他の物品を前記物品の代わりに補充することを促す情報を送信する、
請求項9に記載の業務支援装置。 When the processing unit does not have an inventory of the article for which the need for replenishment has been detected and has an inventory of another article existing on the shelf, the processing unit replenishes the other article in place of the article. Send information to encourage you to
The business support device according to claim 9. - 情報処理装置によって、
補充の必要性が検知された棚及び物品を示す補充検知情報、及び、前記物品の在庫状況を示す在庫情報を受信し、
前記在庫情報に示される補充の必要性が検知された前記物品の在庫状況に基づいて、前記補充検知情報に示される補充の必要性が検知された前記物品の前記棚への補充を促す情報の送信タイミングを制御する、
業務支援方法。 Depending on the information processing device
Receives replenishment detection information indicating the shelves and articles for which the need for replenishment has been detected, and inventory information indicating the inventory status of the articles.
Based on the inventory status of the article in which the necessity of replenishment indicated in the inventory information is detected, the information prompting the replenishment of the article in which the necessity of replenishment indicated in the replenishment detection information is detected is urged. Control the transmission timing,
Business support method. - 補充の必要性が検知された棚及び物品を示す補充検知情報、及び、前記物品の在庫状況を示す在庫情報を受信し、
前記在庫情報に示される補充の必要性が検知された前記物品の在庫状況に基づいて、前記補充検知情報に示される欠品または半欠品が検知された前記物品の前記棚への補充を促す情報の送信タイミングを制御する、ことをコンピュータに実行させる、
コンピュータプログラム。 Receives replenishment detection information indicating the shelves and articles for which the need for replenishment has been detected, and inventory information indicating the inventory status of the articles.
Based on the inventory status of the article in which the necessity of replenishment indicated in the inventory information is detected, the shelf of the article in which the shortage or semi-deficiency indicated in the replenishment detection information is detected is urged to be replenished. Control the timing of sending information, let the computer do that,
Computer program.
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2020-142828 | 2020-08-26 | ||
JP2020142828A JP2022038364A (en) | 2020-08-26 | 2020-08-26 | Business support device, business support method, and computer program |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2022045225A1 true WO2022045225A1 (en) | 2022-03-03 |
Family
ID=80355337
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/JP2021/031256 WO2022045225A1 (en) | 2020-08-26 | 2021-08-25 | Work assistance device, work assistance method, and computer program |
Country Status (2)
Country | Link |
---|---|
JP (1) | JP2022038364A (en) |
WO (1) | WO2022045225A1 (en) |
Families Citing this family (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
EP3984254A1 (en) * | 2019-06-14 | 2022-04-20 | SES-Imagotag GmbH | Method for locating an electronic shelf label |
Citations (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2015103153A (en) * | 2013-11-27 | 2015-06-04 | パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社 | Commodity monitoring device, commodity monitoring system and commodity monitoring method |
JP2015184997A (en) * | 2014-03-25 | 2015-10-22 | 株式会社日立システムズ | Commodity replenishment work support system and commodity replenishment work support method |
-
2020
- 2020-08-26 JP JP2020142828A patent/JP2022038364A/en active Pending
-
2021
- 2021-08-25 WO PCT/JP2021/031256 patent/WO2022045225A1/en active Application Filing
Patent Citations (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2015103153A (en) * | 2013-11-27 | 2015-06-04 | パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社 | Commodity monitoring device, commodity monitoring system and commodity monitoring method |
JP2015184997A (en) * | 2014-03-25 | 2015-10-22 | 株式会社日立システムズ | Commodity replenishment work support system and commodity replenishment work support method |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
JP2022038364A (en) | 2022-03-10 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US20210398099A1 (en) | Estimating shelf capacity from image data to improve store execution | |
CA2511231C (en) | Handheld scanner device with display location database | |
US20180181906A1 (en) | Stock management apparatus, method and system | |
WO2021039126A1 (en) | Work assistance system, work assistance device, work assistance method, and program | |
US11741425B2 (en) | Operating system for brick and mortar retail | |
JP2015184997A (en) | Commodity replenishment work support system and commodity replenishment work support method | |
WO2021100525A1 (en) | Business support device, business support method, computer program, and business support system | |
CN113205200A (en) | Commodity warehousing management method, reservation method, server and supplier terminal | |
JP2021082364A (en) | Business support apparatus, business support method, computer program, and business support system | |
WO2022045225A1 (en) | Work assistance device, work assistance method, and computer program | |
JP2023139297A (en) | Business support system, business support apparatus, business support method, and computer program | |
US11488274B2 (en) | Frontline alerting service tool | |
JP6796787B1 (en) | Business support system, business support device, terminal, business support method, business method, and computer program | |
CN113544717A (en) | Screen display method, program, and screen display system | |
JP7486196B2 (en) | Target management system, target management method and program | |
US20240242179A1 (en) | Information processing apparatus and information processing method | |
US20230306497A1 (en) | Methods and apparatus for integrating retail applications and retail operational subsystems, and optimizing operation of same | |
JP2024101791A (en) | Information processing device, program, and product placement information notification system |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 21861647 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 21861647 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |